Reference Manual

ISODRAFT

Reference Manual

DisclaimerInformation of a technical nature, and particulars of the product and its use, is given by AVEVASolutions Ltd and its subsidiaries without warranty. AVEVA Solutions Ltd and its subsidiaries disclaimany and all warranties and conditions, expressed or implied, to the fullest extent permitted by law.

Neither the author nor AVEVA Solutions Ltd, or any of its subsidiaries, shall be liable to any person orentity for any actions, claims, loss or damage arising from the use or possession of any information,particulars, or errors in this publication, or any incorrect use of the product, whatsoever.

CopyrightCopyright and all other intellectual property rights in this manual and the associated software, and everypart of it (including source code, object code, any data contained in it, the manual and any otherdocumentation supplied with it) belongs to AVEVA Solutions Ltd or its subsidiaries.

All other rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Ltd and its subsidiaries. The information contained inthis document is commercially sensitive, and shall not be copied, reproduced, stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Ltd. Where suchpermission is granted, it expressly requires that this Disclaimer and Copyright notice is prominentlydisplayed at the beginning of every copy that is made.

The manual and associated documentation may not be adapted, reproduced, or copied, in any materialor electronic form, without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Ltd. The user may also notreverse engineer, decompile, copy, or adapt the associated software. Neither the whole, nor part of theproduct described in this publication may be incorporated into any third-party software, product,machine, or system without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Ltd, save as permitted bylaw. Any such unauthorised action is strictly prohibited, and may give rise to civil liabilities and criminalprosecution.

The AVEVA products described in this guide are to be installed and operated strictly in accordance withthe terms and conditions of the respective license agreements, and in accordance with the relevantUser Documentation. Unauthorised or unlicensed use of the product is strictly prohibited.

First published September 2007

© AVEVA Solutions Ltd, and its subsidiaries

AVEVA Solutions Ltd, High Cross, Madingley Road, Cambridge, CB3 0HB, United Kingdom

TrademarksAVEVA and Tribon are registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Ltd or its subsidiaries. Unauthoriseduse of the AVEVA or Tribon trademarks is strictly forbidden.

AVEVA product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Ltd or itssubsidiaries, registered in the UK, Europe and other countries (worldwide).

The copyright, trade mark rights, or other intellectual property rights in any other product, its name orlogo belongs to its respective owner.

AVEVA Solutions Ltd

ISODRAFT Reference Manual

Contents Page


Reference ManualIntroduction to this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1Who Should Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1How this Manual is Organised . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1Conventions Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2

Command Reference Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1Conventions Used in the Syntax Graphs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3Setting Up ISODRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3Bolting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4DESIGN Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4Piping Components in ISODRAFT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5Customising the Drawing Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5Materials List and Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6Isometric Drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7

Alphabetical Command Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:10ADD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:10ANGLEACCURACY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:11ATEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:12ATTEXTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:13ATTANAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:14AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:15BENDRADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:16BOLTFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:17

12.0i


BOLTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:18BOLTREPORT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:20BORES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:21CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:22CHARHEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:23CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:24CLLENGTHFILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:26CONTINUATIONSYMBOLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:27CONTNOTES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:27CONTSHEETS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:28CONTWELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:29COORDINATES or COORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:30CUTBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:31CUTMARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:33CUTPIPELISTFILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:34CUTTINGLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:35DATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:37DELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:38DELIMITER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:38DETAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:39DIMDIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:42DIMLABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:43DIMENSIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:44DISTANCES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:48DTEXTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:49ELEVATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:50EQUIPMENTNUMBERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:50FALLINGLINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:51FALLSKEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:54FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:55FLOWARROWS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:60FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:61INSTALL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:62INSTNAME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:62INSULATIONCONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:63ISO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:64ISOTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:65ITEMCODE (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:66ITEMCODE (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:67JOINTNUMBERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:69

12.0ii


KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:70LEGLENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:71LINETHICKNESS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:71LOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:72MARGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:72MARK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:73MATCONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:74MATERIALLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:75MATLISTFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:81MESSAGEACCURACY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:82MESSAGEFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:83MTEXTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:84OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:85OUTCOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:85OVERALLSKEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:88PBENDNUMBERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:88PICTURESCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:89PLOTDETAILDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:90PLOTTINGSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:91POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:91POSTPROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:99PRECISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:100PREPROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:100PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:100PROJECTNUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:101Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:101RECREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:103REFDIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:103REMOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:104REPEATABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:105RESERVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:106SETCOMPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:107SIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:108SKEWBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:108SPECBREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:113SPLIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:114SPOOLNUMBERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:115STACKINGARRANGEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:117SUPPORTFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:118SUPPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:119

12.0iii


SYMBOLFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:119TAGGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:120TAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:120TEXTPOSITION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:121TITLEBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:122TOLERANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:123TRACINGCONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:124TRANSFERFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:125TRUNCATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:125TTFONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:126TUBESPLITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:127UNDERLAYPLOTNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:128UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:129WASTAGE AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:130WELDANGLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:131WELDID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:132WELDNUMBERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:132WELDTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:135ZEROLENGTHSKEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:136

Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1P-points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2

CAP Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3CLOS Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4COUP Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4CROS Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5ELBO or BEND Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7FBLI Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11FILT Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11FLAN Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:13FTUB Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:15INST Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:16LJSE Symbol Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:21PCOM Symbol Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:21REDU Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:25Concentric Reducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:25

12.0iv


Eccentric Reducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:28

SHU Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:30TEE or OLET Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:30TRAP Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:34UNIO Symbol Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:36UNIVERSAL Symbol Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:36VALV Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:37VENT Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:39VFWA Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:39VTWA Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:40WELD Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:41Floor Penetration ATTA Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:41Welded Lug Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:42Symbol Key Reference Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:42

Alternative Texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1Isometric Drawing Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1Title Block Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5Plotted Material List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:6Line Summary Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:8Printed Material List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:9Weld Box Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:9Bend Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10Dynamic Detail Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10Bolt Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10

Material Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1Creating a Material Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1Overall File Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:2Material Control File Record Identification Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3Individual Formats for Each Type of Information Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3

12.0v


Example of a Material Control File Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:9

Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A:1

Examples of Isometric Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B:1

Transferring Data to the COMPIPE Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C:1Invoking the COMPIPE Interface in ISODRAFT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C:1Controlling the Contents of the COMPIPE Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C:1Pipe Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C:2Detail Text Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C:2Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C:2Itemcodes containing the / character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:2Instruments and Supports Tag Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:3Material per Isometric Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:3Specification Breaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:3System and Spool Isometrics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:3Use of MARK REV, MARK DETAIL, REPEATABILITY ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:3

Format of COMPIPE Linelist File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C:4Format of COMPIPE MTO FIle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C:5

Recommendations for Importing DXF files from ISODRAFT into MicroStation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D:1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D:1Importing a DXF File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D:1Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D:1Installing Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D:1Utilities/Install Fonts menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D:2

DXF/DGN translation: Making Fonts Active for the Import Function . . . . . . . .D:2Compilation of the DXF/DGN Macro Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D:2Use of 16-bit Fonts (Far Eastern Fonts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D:3Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D:3Plotting the DGN file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D:4

12.0vi

ISODRAFT Reference ManualIntroduction to this Manual

1 Introduction to this Manual

This document is a Reference Manual for ISODRAFT. It describes all the commandsavailable to control the production of isometric drawings. It also shows the default SymbolKEYs (SKEYs) that are used to plot the drawings and gives examples of PLOT files.

1.1 Who Should Use This ManualThis manual is aimed at experienced PDMS users and system administrators, who areresponsible for setting company standards for isometric production. It is assumed readershave attended an ‘Isometric Drawing Production training course’, which covers therelationship between the Catalogue database and ISODRAFT as well as ISODRAFT itself.

1.2 How this Manual is OrganisedThis manual is divided up into a number of logical chapters, as follows:

Command Reference Section - gives reference information for all of the ISODRAFTcommands.

Symbol Keys - illustrates the standard symbols used in ISODRAFT drawings, with theirreference codes (SKEYs), dimension and cataloguing requirements.

Alternative Texts - provides a complete listing of all standard text phrases used inISODRAFT drawings, with their reference codes (Alternative text or ATEXT numbers).

Material Control File - describes the Material Control File which can be used to pass detailsof material requirements to an external material control program.

Error Messages - explains the error messages which may be output during an ISODRAFTsession.

Examples of Isometric Plots - contains examples of isometric plots illustrating the mainfacilities provided by ISODRAFT.

Transferring Data to the COMPIPE Module - gives details of how to pass ISODRAFTmaterial data to the COMPIPE module of the COMDACE system. This is specialistinformation and need only be read by those users who will use this facility.

Recommendations for Importing DXF files from ISODRAFT into MicroStation - gives detailsof how to import ISODRAFT Isometric drawings into MicroStation as DXF files and thencorrect any colour and font errors that may occur.

12.0 1:1

ISODRAFT Reference ManualIntroduction to this Manual

1.3 Conventions Used in This ManualCommands are shown in a combination of uppercase and lowercase letters. In general,these commands can be abbreviated. When a command is shown in this manual, the capitalletters of the command indicate the minimum abbreviation.

Note: This convention does not mean that you have to type the second part of thecommand in lowercase letters. You can enter commands in any combination ofuppercase and lowercase letters.

For example, you can enter the command Check in any of the following forms:

CHCHECHECCHECK

You cannot abbreviate commands shown wholly in uppercase letters.

Lowercase italics describe command arguments. You should replace the descriptionshown by the text or value you require. Here are some examples:

Name Definition Example

name A PDMS element name /PIPE-A63

refno A PDMS reference number =23/1403

integer A positive integer 3

value A positive or negative number 3.142

word A sequence of up to four letters FLOW

text An alphanumeric string ’Enclose between closing quotes’

filename The path name of a file //net/sg99/testing. Note that when afull path name is given, it will start withtwo slashes: the first one is neededbecause all names in PDMS muststart with a slash, and the second oneis the root of the path name.

12.0 1:2

ISODRAFT Reference ManualCommand Reference Section

2 Command Reference Section

2.1 Conventions Used in the Syntax GraphsThe commands described in this chapter are presented in the form of syntax graphs.

• Commands are shown in a combination of uppercase and lowercase letters, wherethe capital letters indicate the minimum abbreviation.

Note: This convention does not mean that the second part of the command must be typedin lowercase letters; commands may be entered in any combination of uppercaseand lowercase letters.

• For example, the command:

Create

• can be input in any of the following forms:

CRCRECREACREATCREATE

• Commands shown in all uppercase letters cannot be abbreviated.• Command arguments are shown in lowercase letters. These are just descriptions of

what you need to enter. For example:

FONTDirectory name

• means that to set the name of the Font Directory to newfonts, you enter

FONTD newfonts

• Syntax graphs are read from top left to bottom right. The start point is shown by >, andyou can follow any path through the graph until the exit point, shown by >, is reached.

• Points marked with a plus sign (+) are option junctions which allow you to input anyone of the commands to the right of the junction. For example:

>---+--- ABC ---.| ||--- PQR --- || |‘------------+->

• means you can type in ABC or PQR or just press Enter to get the default option.• Text in angle brackets <. . . > is the name of another syntax graph. This convention is

used for syntax which occurs in many places. The graphs referred to are described atthe end of this section. For example:

12.02:1


>---+--- ABC -----.| ||--- PQR -----|| ||--- <dia> ---|| |‘-------------+--->

• means you can type in ABC or PQR or any command allowed by the syntax given indiagram <dia> or just press Enter to get the default option.

• Points marked with an asterisk (*) are loop back junctions. Command optionsfollowing these may be repeated as required. For example:

.-----<-------. / |

>---*--- option1 ---|| ||--- option2 ---|| |‘--- option3 ---+--->

• means that you can enter any combination of option1 and/or option2 and/or option3,where the options can be commands, other syntax diagrams, or command arguments.

• The simplified format .----<------. / |

>---*--- name ----+--->

• means that you may type in a list of PDMS names, separated by at least one space.• Names in lowercase letters enclosed in angled brackets (e.g. <gid>) represent

subsidiary syntax diagrams. Most of the subsidiary syntax diagrams are given in theSoftware Customisation Guide. The only ones used in this manual are <gid> and<uval>.

• In ISODRAFT, the <gid> syntax has the restricted range of options shown here.>---+--- name ----.

| |‘--- refno ---+--->

• The full range of options for <gid> are shown in the Command Reference Section ofthe Software Customisation Guide. They apply only to database navigation operations.

• <uval> is used to enter a dimension using a unit of measurement which is not thecurrent default unit:>---+-- value -----.

| |‘-- <expres> --+-- EXponential -- value --.

| |‘--------------------------+--- MM -------.

| ||--- Metres ---|| ||--- INches ---|| ||--- FT -------|| ||--- FEet -----|| ||--- text -----|

12.02:2


| |‘--------------+-->

• where <expres> is another subsidiary diagram representing the range of mathematicalexpressions which can be used to input values, and text represents a user-defined unitof measurement. Using expressions in PDMS is described in the SoftwareCustomisation Guide.

• For example:

9.75 INCH 1.5 FT

Note: For information about the syntax for PML, the PDMS Programmable MacroLanguage, and the PDMS forms and menus, see the Software Customisation Guide.

2.2 Command SummaryThe following sections list the MODULE commands in functional groups. These sectionscorrespond to Chapters 2 to 9 in the ISODRAFT User Guide.

2.2.1 Setting Up ISODRAFT

COMMAND Brief description

ADD Adds named elements to the list of elements to be processedby the CHECK or DETAIL command.

CHANGEHIGHLIGHTING

Represents changed items on a drawing in a different colourpen.

CHECK Extracts isometric data from the database but does not pass itto the plotting function. This is used to check the data orcreate a transfer file.

DELETE Deletes an SKEY definition from a symbol library.

DETAIL Generates and plots isometric drawings for the elements inthe list.

FILE Specifies the name of the PLOT file to which the isometricdrawing output is sent.

INSTALLSETUP Restores the settings to those saved in the macro or binary fileusing the RECREATE command.

MESSAGEFILENAME Specifies the name of the file to which messages about theprogress of the detailing are sent.

OPTIONS Allows you to reset all options to their default settings.

POSTPROCESS Lets you specify up to five system commands which are to beexecuted during ISODRAFT’s intermediate transfer fileprocessing.

PROCESS Instructs ISODRAFT to process a transfer file.

12.02:3


2.2.2 Bolting

2.2.3 DESIGN Requirements

Query Allows you to find the current settings of the options.

RECREATE Creates a macro or binary file which can be read intoISODRAFT to restore the current settings.

REMOVE Removes elements from the list to be detailed.

SETCOMPDATE Sets the Comparison Date for an MDB or DB.

SYMBOLFILENAME Specifies the name of a symbol library.

TRANSFERFILENAME Allows you to save a transfer file generated duringISODRAFT’S data extraction operations, for subsequentprocessing.



BOLTFILE Specifies the name of the bolt report file, produced using theBOLTREPORT command.

BOLTING Specifies where and how the bolt lengths are to be shown in thematerial list.

BOLTREPORT Allows you to output a report on the bolting containing identicalinformation to that displayed in the material list.


JOINTNUMBERS Allows you to display the joint numberscreated in SPOOLER on the isometric.

MATERIAL LIST PARTNUMBERSFROMDB

Allows you to select whether to use the partnumbers created by SPOOLER.

PBENDNUMBERS Allows you to display the pulled bendnumbers created in SPOOLER on theisometric.

SPOOLNUMBERS FROMDB Lets you specify whether to use the numberscreated by SPOOLER or let ISODRAFTnumber the spools itself.

WELDNUMBERS FROMDB Lets you decide whether to use the numberscreated by SPOOLER or let ISODRAFTnumber the spools itself.

12.02:4


2.2.4 Piping Components in ISODRAFT

2.2.5 Customising the Drawing Sheet


CUTBACK To make sure there is sufficient length between apulled bend and the end of the pipe to be gripped bythe bending machine and that a pipe with a threadedend is long enough to be gripped by the threading,machine.

LOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE Allows you to specify an additional length on cut tubeto compensate for field-fitted welds and loose flanges,where the ALLO attribute has not been set.


ATEXT Allows you to change the standard text on isometricdrawings.

CUTMARKS Draws cut marks at each corner of the overalldrawing sheet.

DATE Allows you to specify the format for showing the datein the drawing’s title block.

DISTANCES Allows you to specify the units to be used for input oflengths and distances.

FRAME Specifies whether or not drawing frame lines and textare drawn.

ISO Defines the view direction to be used for generatingthe isometric plot.

ISOTYPE Defines whether the isometric will show fabricationinformation, erection information or both.

MARGIN Specifies the width of the margin on each side of thedrawing.

MARK Allows you to define whether the pipe revisionattribute (REV) should be incremented and theBranch detail attribute should be set to true aftersuccessful detailing.

PLOTDETAILDATA Allows you to define whether and how to displayparameterised attribute data in the detail PLOT files.

PLOTTINGSCALE Defines the scale of the plot independently of thedrawing sheet size.

12.02:5


2.2.6 Materials List and Reports

POSITION Allows you to create tables of standard textannotations or pipe attributes.

PROJECTNUMBER Writes the project number into the title block area.

RESERVE Allows you to specify a blank area at the bottom ofeither the drawing or material list areas.

SIZE Specifies the overall dimensions of the drawingsheet.

STACKINGARRANGEMENT Allows you to define how to position multiple plots ona single sheet.

TEXTPOSITION Allows you to create tables of standard textannotations or pipe attributes.

TITLEBLOCK Allows you to add extra text to the title block.

UNDERLAYPLOTNAME Allows you to define a background PLOT file; lettingyou plot directly on top of this background plot.



ATTEXTS Defines selection rules and expressions (typicallyattribute values) for appending attached text todescriptions in material lists.

CLLENGTHFILE Specifies that a pipe centreline length summary, with orwithout an insulation centreline summary, should beoutput as a report.

CUTPIPELISTFILE Produces a customisable report giving details of all cutpipes in the isometric.

CUTTINGLIST Defines a table in the material list showing details of allthe cut pipes in the isometric.

DELIMITER Specifies which character ISODRAFT recognises asthe itemcode suffix delimiter.

DTEXTS Controls the material description part of the itemdescription.

EQUIPMENTNUMBERING Controls numbering of items on materials list for anequipment trim isometric.

INSTNAME Allows you to define how instruments are described inthe materials list.

ITEMCODE (1) Allows you to label certain types of fitting with theiritemcodes on the isometric drawing.

12.02:6


2.2.7 Isometric Drawing

ITEMCODE (2) Specifies whether or not specification names are to beincluded in material list itemcodes, and whether itemswhich have the same itemcode except for thespecification name and suffix are treated as the sameitem.

KEYS Allows components with specified SKEYs to be treatedlike instruments.

MATCONTROL Creates a material control file.

MATERIALLIST Allows you to control whether the material list is drawnon the isometric and alter the display format if required.

MATLISTFILENAME Specifies the name of the file into which the materialslist can be saved.

MTEXTS Controls the complete material description part of theitem description.

SUPPORTFILENAME Specifies the name of a file into which the schedule forpipe supports is saved.

WASTAGEAREA Defines wastage areas that can be given differentwastage factors for cut pipe lengths.



ANGLEACCURACY Allows you to specify the degree of accuracy for thereporting of angles.

ATTANAME Specifies the ways in which support ATTAs are identified.

AXES Specifies the coordinate system to be used for showing3D positions on drawings.

BENDRADIUS Specifies when radii of pulled bends will be shown and inwhat units.

CHARHEIGHT Specifies the character height to be used for annotatingtext on drawings.

CONTINUATIONSYMBOLS Plots continuation symbols where pipes are connected tonozzles on Plant equipment.

CONTNOTES Specifies continuation notes at the end points ondrawings for when the connection goes to anotherisometric.

12.02:7


CONTSHEETS Allows you to specify that the sheet number of thecontinuation sheets be shown

CONTWELDS Allows you to plot welds on the current isometric that areto belong to another drawing.

COORDINATES Specifies the drawing locations at which spatialcoordinates are shown.

DIMDIST Specifies the ‘standout’ distance, between dimensioninglines and pipe/ component centrelines.

DIMENSIONS Specifies dimensioning style.

ELEVATION Specifies whether or not elevation coordinates are to beshown.

FALLINGLINES Defines the maximum rate of fall allowed in a pipelinebefore it is shown as a skew.

FALLSKEWS Controls how dimensioning boxes for skewed/fallingpipelines are shown.

FLOWARROWS Allows flow arrows to be shown on isometric plots.

INSULATIONCONTROL Specifies whether or not insulation is to be plotted.

LEGLENGTH Allows you to specify the plotted leg length of elbows,tees and crosses.

LINETHICKNESS Allows you to control (optionally) the thickness of lineused to represent piping.

MESSAGEACCURACY Controls how arrowed messages on the isometric arepositioned.

OUTCOM Defines the style in which attributes are shown on theisometric drawing area.

OVERALLSKEWS Allows you to specify whether triangular skewboxes areshown as overall skewboxes across branches, or asseparate skewboxes between branch connections.

PICTURESCALE Allows you to set the scale of the isometric drawing.

PRECISION Sets bore dimensions to be nominal or actual.

REFDIMENSIONS Switches the display of reference dimensions on and off.

REPEATABILITY Creates split ATTAs at automatically generated splitpoints.

SKEWBOX Controls how skewed piping is shown.


12.02:8


SPECBREAK Specifies the level at which a change of pipelinespecification is noted, and which changes are shown.

SPLIT Controls the number of drawing sheets used when apipeline is split over more than one sheet.

SUPPORTS Defines whether support positions are shown and aredimensioned as overall or string dimensions.

TAGGING Allows you to identify individual components on theisometric plot by means of name tags.

TAPPING Sets the scale of the tapping leg and switches tapping legdimensions and coordinates on and off.

TOLERANCE Specifies the maximum misalignment betweencomponents regarded as having the same axis.

TRACINGCONTROL Specifies whether or not tracing is to be plotted.

TRUNCATE Stops rounding remainders of dimensions being added tothe next dimension.

TUBESPLITS Controls how splits in tube are placed.

UNITS Specifies units of measurement to be used forISODRAFT’s output.

WELDANGLES Allows configuration in which one pipe is welded toanother pipe or component such that the flow directionsof the two objects are non-parallel.

WELDID Allows you to identify individual welds on the isometric byname.

WELDNUMBERS Controls numbering the welds on an isometric.

WELDTYPE Controls which types of end connection are shown ondrawings.

ZEROLENGTH-SKEWS Allows you to connect a vertical Branch to a falling line.


12.02:9


2.3 Alphabetical Command Reference

2.3.1 ADD

Function: Adds named elements to the list of elements to be processed bythe next CHECK or DETAIL command.

Description: The elements to be checked or detailed by ISODRAFT can bedefined before giving a CHECK or DETAIL command by settingup a Detail List. You add elements to the list using the ADDcommand and remove them using the REMOVE command.(The REMOVE command is often used to remove members ofan owning element such as Site or Zone which have beenadded.) The next CHECK ALL or DETAIL ALL command willthen process all the elements in the Detail List.

If a Pipe is detailed with repeatability on, split points can bestored in the DESIGN database. As such, individual sheets canbe added to the Detail List. See the REPEATABILITY command.

Examples: ADD /ZONE2 /PIPE3-2

Adds Zone 2 and PIPE3-2 to the Detail List.

ADD SHEE 2 /PIPE-2

Adds sheet 2 of PIPE-2 to the Detail List.

ADD SHEE SING /PIPE2

Adds /PIPE-2 to the Detail List, and specifies that theisometric will be plotted on a single sheet

ADD SPOO 2 /PIPE-4

Adds spool 2 of /PIPE-4 to the Detail List.

ADD SPOO 2 OF 3 /PIPE-4

Adds spool 2 of sheet 3 of /PIPE-4 to the Detail List. Thisform of the command can only be used in conjunction withSPOOLNUMBERS PERDRAWING.

ADD SPOO ‘SPOO20’ /PIPE-5

Adds the spool identified by the text SPOO20 of /PIPE-5 tothe Detail List

Related Commands:

REMOVE CHECK DETAIL REPEATABILITY

12.02:10


2.3.2 ANGLEACCURACY

Command Syntax:

.----<---------------------------------------------./ |

>- ADD --*-- <gid> -------------------------------------------|| ||-- SHEETNumber --+-- integer --. || | | || '-- SINGle ---+------------. || | |‘-- SPOOl ---+-- integer --.-- OF integer --| |

| | | || '-----------------| || | |‘-- text -----------------------+-<gid>-+->

Restrictions: The maximum number of element identifiers allowed in an AddList is 100.

The maximum number of items for any single pipe (sheets orspools) is 20. You can only add sheets for a Pipe which haspreviously been detailed with REPEATABILITY on, so that splitpoints have been stored in the DESIGN database. See theREPEATABILITY command.

Querying: Q DETaillist

Lists contents of both Add andRemove lists.

Function: Allows you to specify the degree of accuracy for the reportingof angles on the isometric.

Description: For bend and elbow angles, and orientation angles for tees,valve and instrument spindles, you can vary the accuracywith which ISODRAFT reports the angle on the isometric.

You can use one of two settings:

0 To the nearest 0.1 degree (default)

1 To the nearest 0.01 degree

Examples: ANGLEACC 1

Sets angle reporting accuracy to the nearest 0.01degree.

Related Commands: FALLINGLINES

Command Syntax: >--- ANGLEACCuracy value --->

where value is either 0 or 1 (as described above).

12.02:11


2.3.3 ATEXT

Function: Allows you to change standard text on isometric drawings.

Description: Each standard annotation text on an ISODRAFT drawing isidentified by a unique code number, known as its Atext(Alternative Text) number. The ATEXT command allows youto change the text characters associated with a particularAtext number, so that your text replaces the standard text atthe same place on the drawing.

Alternative text should contain only standard ISODRAFTcharacters, since certain keyboard symbols cannot bereproduced by ISODRAFT. The normal character set forISODRAFT consists of:

The letters A to Z inclusive The letters a to z inclusiveThe numbers 0 to 9 inclusive The space character + - * . , [ ] ( ) : # ’ = |

Text can be deleted by redefining it as a null string, that is, theAtext number followed by two quotes with no charactersbetween them.

Text is reset to the standard by giving the command ATEXTjust followed by the Atext number.

See Alternative Texts for a list of all standard Atexts with theircorresponding Atext numbers.

Examples: ATEXT 15 ’STRAIGHT TUBE’

Sets Atext 15 to the specified wording.

ATEXT 15

Resets Atext 15 to its default wording, ’STRAIGHTPIPE’.

ATEXT 410 ’’

Deletes Atext number 410, the line summary note.

Command Syntax: >-- ATExt -- atextnumber --+-- newtext --.| |‘-------------+-->

where atextnumber identifies the text to be changed andnewtext defines the new text to be associated with that Atextnumber.

Note: newtext must be enclosed between quotes in theusual way.

12.02:12


2.3.4 ATTEXTS

Querying: Q ---- ATExt ---+--- integer --------.| ||--- DRAWing --------|| ||--- TITLeblock -----|| ||--- PRINtedmatl ----|| ||--- PLOTtedmatl ----|| ||--- LINEsummary ----|| ||--- WELDbox --------|| ||--- BOLTreport -----|| ||--- BENDtable ------|| |‘--- ALL ------------+--->

Q ATEXT 15 Gives current text for Atext 15.

Q ATEXT DRAW

Gives current text for all Atexts associatedwith the drawing area. Alternative Textslists Atexts grouped under the areas withwhich they are associated. Settingschanged from the default are shown byasterisks *.

Q ATEXT ALL Gives current text for all Atexts. Settingschanged from the default are shown byasterisks *.

Function: Allows you to append text, typically UDA and/or otherattribute settings, to descriptions in material lists.

Description: Standard descriptions in material lists comprise a geometricdescription (RTEX attribute of DTEXT) and a materialdescription (XTEX attribute of MTEXT). This command letsyou append further text defined by an expression (typicallyincluding settings of UDAs or other attributes) if apredefined selection rule gives a True result.

12.02:13


2.3.5 ATTANAME

Examples: ATTEX (Flange '+AFTER (NAME,'/')+' at position '+STR(POS)+' has 'STR (NWELDS)+' additional welds') ON allflange with (NWELDS GT 0)

If a flange has additional welds, appends the text 'Flange /name at position, position has number additional welds' tothe item description in the material list.

ATTEX (Colour: ' + :Colour) ON ALL BRANCH MEMBERS

Appends the text 'Colour: colour_defined_by_UDA_:Colour' to the descriptions of all branch members.

Command Syntax: >- ATTEXts -+- expression - ON - selection_rule -.| |‘- NONE -----------------------------+-->

where expression defines the text to be appended ifselection_rule evaluates to a True result.

Function: Specifies the ways in which support ATTAs are identified onISODRAFT drawings.

Description: By default, the names of support attachment points (that is,all ATTAs for which the ATTY attribute is unset) are notshown on the isometric plot and their SPREFs(specification references) are used as their itemcodes.

You can use the ATTANAME command to display thePDMS names of support ATTAs on the drawings, and tospecify whether their PDMS names or their SPREFs areused as their itemcodes.

By default, ATTA names are not shown on the isometric plotand their SPREFs are used as their itemcodes.

Examples: ATTANAME DRAWING

Support ATTAs identified by name on the drawing;SPREFs used as itemcodes.

ATTANAME SPREF

Support ATTAs identified by name on the drawing;names also used as itemcodes.

ATTANAME OFF

ATTA names not shown on drawings; SPREFs usedas itemcodes.

12.02:14


2.3.6 AXES

Note: To minimise inaccuracies when performing calculations using very large coordinates,ISODRAFT performs all its calculations relative to the origin of the Zone that ownsthe first Branch in the detail list. Thus when creating piping a great distance from theWorld origin, it is beneficial to move the Zone origin first, to a position local to wherethe piping will be created. (If the Zone origin is at the World origin, no benefit will begained by this approach.)

Command Syntax: >--- ATTAName ---+--- DRAwing ---.| ||--- SPREf -----|| |‘--- OFF* ------+--->

Querying: Q ATTANameQ OPTions

Function: Specifies the coordinate system to be used for showing 3Dpositions on drawings.

Description: By default, all spatial coordinates on isometrics are given inthe World coordinate system. The AXES command allowsyou to specify a different coordinate system for theisometric. You can use the origin of any database elementwhich has an origin.

Each owning element (Site, Zone etc.) in a design projecthas its own coordinate system for locating the elements itowns. The coordinates of an element are usually definedwith respect to its owner, and these coordinates are notnormally the same as World coordinates.

Examples: AXES /SITE_PIPE-2

All coordinates to be referred to the origin of siteSITE_PIPE-2.

AXES WORLD

Resets to the default of the World coordinates.

Command Syntax: >--- AXES --- <gid> --->

Querying: Q AXESQ OPTions

12.02:15


2.3.7 BENDRADIUS

Function: Specifies when radii of pulled bends will be shown on drawings andin what units.

Description: By default, bend radii will be output in distance units for all pulledbends, that is for all components with SKEYs beginning with PB.The radii of pulled bends are extracted from their RADI attributes. Ifthe RADI attribute is set to zero and the SKEY is of the formatPBnD where n is an integer (e.g. PB5D), then the integer will beextracted, multiplied by the pipe diameter, converted to distanceunits if appropriate, and output as the bend radius.

Bend radii can be shown either in distance units or as multiples ofpipe diameters (where pipe diameter is taken as the nominal boreof the pipe). The Atexts associated with the output of bend radii areAtext 337, ‘D BEND RADIUS’ (for bend radii in multiples of pipediameters), and Atext 338, ‘BEND RADIUS’ (for bend radii indistance units). Setting either of these to be blank causes the entiremessage to be suppressed, including the actual radius value.

A standard radius for bends can be set using the BENDRADIUSSTANDARD command. If a standard radius is set, only bends whichhave radii different from the standard radius will have their radiishown individually. Both the standard radius and any individual radiiwill be shown in the same format (i.e. in distance units or in pipediameters).

A note giving the value of the standard radius can be positioned onthe sheet using the POSITION command. The usual method is toplot a suitable message, such as:

All pulled bends to be D unless otherwise shown

as part of an underlay (see the UNDERLAYPLOTFILE command).Then use the POSITION command to create text giving the actualradius value in the space immediately before the D.

You can also include a table of bending data on the isometric usingthe POSITION command (see POSITION BENDTABLE commandfor more details).

Examples: BENDRAD DEFAULTBENDRAD

All bend radii to be shown in current distance units (nostandard value).

BENDRAD STAND 200

Bend radii to be shown in mm, but only if not equal to 200mm(assumes current distance units are mm).

BENDRAD DIAM

Bend radii to be shown as multiples of pipe diameters.

12.02:16


2.3.8 BOLTFILE

BENDRAD STAND 5 DIAM

Bend radii to be shown as multiples of pipe diameters, butonly if they do not equal 5 diameters.

BENDRAD OFF

No bend radii to be shown on the drawing.

BENDRADIUS STANDARD 5DPOSI BENDRADIUS AT X200 Y50Standard bend radius note output at specified position. Only non-standard radii output on isometric. Both standard note and non-standard radii output in multiples of pipe diameter.

BENDRAD STAN 1000POSI BENDRAD AT X200 Y50

Standard bend radius note output at specified position. Onlynon-standard radii output on isometric. Both standard noteand non-standard radii output in current distance units (mm orinch).

Command Syntax: >-- BENDRADius --+-- DEFault -----------------------------.| ||-- STANdard -- value --. || | ||-----------------------+-- Diameters ---|| | || '----------------|‘-- OFF ---------------------------------+->

Querying: Q BENDRADiusQ OPTions

Function: This specifies the name of the bolt report file produced via theBOLTREPORT command.

Description: The bolt report file is an ASCII file. You can specify a page lengthfor the file (with a default of 55 lines), and whether the reportshould append to an existing file (default) or overwrite an existingfile.

Examples: BOLTF /BOLTREP1

Gives the resulting bolt report file the name BOLTREP1. If this filealready exists, the information produced from the BOLTREPORTcommand will be added to the end of the existing file.

BOLTF /BOLTREP1 OVER

Specifies that the bolt report file should overwrite ANY existing fileof the same name.

BOLTF /BOLTREP1 WI 70 LI

Specifies that the bolt report file name is BOLTREP1 and that ithas a page length of 70 lines.

12.02:17


2.3.9 BOLTING

Related Commands: BOLTING BOLTREPORT MATERIALLIST

Command Syntax: >-----BOLTFile filename ---+---OVERwrite--------.| |‘--WIth value LInes -+--->

Function: Specifies where and how bolt lengths are to be shown in thematerial list.

Description: ISODRAFT calculates bolting requirements from the Cataloguebolt tables. Bolt lengths can be included in the itemcode or theitem description or both. If bolt lengths are to be included in theitemcodes, they can either be appended to the rest of the codeor they can be inserted in place of a specified text string.

By default, bolt lengths are included in the item descriptioncolumn of the material list and are appended to the itemcodes.

For the Material Control File, you can specify that the lengthsand diameters are both shown as metric, or both shown asimperial. Setting the Material Control file units changes the boltdimensioning units specified by the UNITS command; it sets aflag in the Material Control File (the ‘tens’ column of Word 2 ofRecord 60). This flag setting can be interpreted by anindependent material control program, which must provide itsown look-up tables of standard size conversions to give therequired dimensioning units.

You can set up the SPCOM name in the Specification to includetext which can then be replaced by the bolt lengths to form theitemcode.

Examples: BOLT LENG DESC ON

Bolt lengths shown in description column of material list.

BOLT LENG ITEMCODE INSERT AT ’Here’

Bolt lengths replace locating text ‘Here’ in the itemcode.

BOLT LENG DESC OFF ITEMCODE INSERT ’Here’

Bolt lengths omitted from description column, but insertedin itemcode column where shown by the ‘Here’ keyword.

BOLTing LENgth ITEMcode APPend

Adds the bolt length to the end of the itemcode.

12.02:18


BOLTing LENgth ITEMcode OFF

Bolt lengths not shown in itemcode.

BOLTING DEFAULT

Resets all bolting options to their default states, namely:

Lengths shown in descriptions.Lengths appended to itemcodes.Material control units flag set to metric lengths and imperialdiameters.

BOLTing OFFBolting information will not be shown on the material list.

Command Syntax:

>-BOLTing --+-- UNITs --+-- METImp* ---.| | || |-- METric ----|| | || |-- IMPerial --|| | || ‘-- DEFault ---+-------------------------------.| || .----------------------------------------. || / | ||-- LENgth --*-- DESCription --+-- ON* --. | || | | | | || | '-- OFF --+--------------| || | | || ‘-- ITEMcode --+-- OFF --------------------| || | | || |-- APPend* ----------------| || | | || ‘-- INSert -+- AT -. | || | | | || ‘------+- text -+--|| || ||-- DEFault --. || | |

‘-- OFF ------+--------------------------------------------+->

Querying: Q BOLTing Q OPTions

12.02:19


2.3.10 BOLTREPORT

Function: Allows you to output a bolt report containing equivalentinformation to that contained in the material list.

Description: BOLTREPORT generates a material list file relevant to bolting.You don‘t need to have all the piping geometry correct beforecreating a report, but you do have to have the pipes populatedwith flanges and flanged components.

Note: It is vital to have connectivity correct before generatingthe report to make sure that all pipes are fully scanned.

You can include positional information in the report, consistingof the centrelines of associated flanges in the coordinatesystem (as defined by the AXES command).

Note: Bolting reports can be produced even if you have turnedmaterial lists off (with the MATEriallist OFF command).

If you specify a filename for the report using the BOLTFILEcommand the information will be output to an ASCII file.Otherwise the report will be sent to your screen.

Finally, you should note that in the material list the bolt diameteris output in the units determined by the UNITS option, and thebolt length inserted in the itemcode and description is output inunits determined by the BOLTING UNITS option (this isbecause all items in the material list must take the samediameter units). The bolting report, however, does not have thisrestriction. That is, the units of the diameter of the bolt aredetermined by the BOLTING UNITS option.

The report will contain the following information:• Diameter in mm or inches (determined by the BOLTING

UNITS command)• Length in mm or inches (determined by the BOLTING

UNITS command)• Itemcode (format defined by options settings, not

truncated)• Description (unless MATERIALLIST NODESCRIPTIONS

has been set)• Position (if requested in the BOLTREPORT syntax)• Quantity for erection and/or quantity for fabrication

materials. The quantity will be summated if the diameter,length and itemcode are identical. Erection and fabricationquantities are summated separately.

Examples: BOLTR /PIPE-1

Outputs a bolting report for PIPE-1.

BOLTR ALL WITH POS

Outputs a bolting report for all pipes in the detail list,including positional information.

12.02:20


2.3.11 BORES

Related Commands: BOLTING BOLTFILE MATERIALLIST

Command Syntax: .---------<---------.| |

>-- BOLTReport --+---------+---- <gid> --------|| | |‘-- ALL --+-- WITH POSition --|

| |‘-------------------+-->

Function: Allows you to specify the units for input of pipe nominal bores.

Description: The default units for the input of dimensions (i.e. the units whichare assumed if you enter a dimension simply as a value) arenormally derived from the Catalogue. You may change thedefault units independently for input of pipe bores and/ordistances along pipelines or across components by using therelated BORES and DISTANCES commands.

Note: The UNITS command is used to set output units.

The current default units can be overridden for any item of input data by giving the units explicitly.

Examples: MM BORES

Input bores assumed to be in mm unless otherwisespecified.

INCH BORES

Input bores assumed to be in inches unless otherwisespecified.

FINCH BORES

Input bores assumed to be in feet and inches unlessotherwise specified (e.g. 1’3 represents 1ft 3in, 9represents 9in).

Related Commands: DISTANCES

Command Syntax: >---+--- MILlimetre ---.| ||--- MM -----------|| ||--- FInch --------|| |‘--- INch ---------+--- BOres -------.

| |‘--- DIstances ---+--->

Querying: Q UNIts

12.02:21


2.3.12 CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING

Function: Represents changed items on a drawing in a different colour.

Description: Change Highlighting enables you to set standards for howchanged items on drawings will be represented.

By default, Change Highlighting is OFF. If set ON, then allchanged components complying with the defined changehighlighting rules, will be shown in the specified highlight colour.A Change Rule applies to components only. For table entries,material list entries, annotations and dimensions; these willalways be drawn in the specified highlight colour if they havechanged. The default highlight colour is red. The user mayspecify one of 12 pen colours to represent the changed items.The integer associated with each colour is as follows: 1 = grey, 2= red, 3 = orange, 4 = yellow, 5 = green, 6 = cyan, 7 = blue, 8 =violet, 9 = brown, 10 = white, 11 = pink, 12 = mauve.

In order to determine which items have changed you mustspecify a Comparison Date, this determines the baseline in timefor the drawing. Any item that has changed since this baselinetime will then be subject to Change Highlighting. TheComparison Date is entered either as an actual date/time or asa Stamp. A Stamp is a way of referencing database(s) atspecified stages in a project. For more information on Stampsrefer to the Administrator Command Reference Manual and theAdministrator User Guide.

Examples: CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING ON

Turns the Change Highlighting function 'on'.

CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING OFF

Turns the Change Highlighting function 'off'.

CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING CLEAR

Removes all defined Change Highlighting rules.

CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING RULE ALL ELBO WITH (MODIFIED())

All modified elbows will be shown in the selected highlightpen colour.

CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING RULE ALL ELBO WITH (MODIFIED(POS))

All elbows whose position has been modified will beshown in the selected highlight pen colour.

12.02:22


2.3.13 CHARHEIGHT

CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING RULE ALL ELBO WITH(CREATED())

All newly created elbows will be shown in the selectedhighlight pen colour.

CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING COLOUR 8

Sets the Change Highlighting pen colour to violet.

Related Commands SETCOMPDATE

Command Syntax:

>--- CHANGE---|--- HIGHLIGHTING---+-- ON ---------------------. |-- OFF --------------------| |-- CLEAR ------------------| |-- COLOUR ----- integer ---| ‘-- RULE ----+-- UNSET -----|

‘-- <SELATT> --+--->

Querying: Q CHANGE HIGHLIGHTINGQ CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING MODEQ CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING COLOURQ CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING RULE

Function: Specifies the character height to be used for annotating text ondrawings.

Description: The CHARHeight command defines the height of charactersused on isometric drawings.

This command does not affect characters: on the material list,which are controlled by the MATERIALLIST CHARHeightcommand; weld numbers or characters in the title block andframe.

Example: CHARH 2.0 corresponds to 2.0mm

CHARH 0.125 INCH corresponds to 1/8 inch

Command Syntax: >--- CHARHeight - value ----->

Querying: Q CHARHeightQ OPTions

12.02:23


2.3.14 CHECK

Function: Creates a transfer file.

Description: The CHECK command extracts isometric data from the Designand Catalogue databases and creates a transfer file.

The extended CHECK AS ... option allows you to check acomplete system isometric with a single command.

The extended CHECK AS EQUIPMENT ... option allows you tocheck a collection of pipes as equipment trim.

If a Pipe is detailed with repeatability on, split points can bestored in the DESIGN database. In this case, individual sheetscan be added to the Detail List. See the REPEATABILITYcommand.

The capability to CHECK Pipe Spools (PSPOOLs) and PipeSpool Lists (PSLISTs) is available in ISODRAFT.

All of the functionality available to CHECK PIPEs andBRANCHes in earlier versions of Isodraft is now also availableto CHECK PSPOOLs and PSLISTs. Such PSPOOLs andPSLISTs are created in the Pipe Production Checks utility in theDesign module and, after their creation, they are visiblebeneath the owning pipe in the Design Explorer. Then they aresubsequently also visible in the Design Explorer in the Isodraftmodule. The PSPOOL or PSLIST may be made the CurrentElement (CE) and then CHECKed in the usual way.

A second way in which PSPOOLs and PSLISTs may beCHECKed is by making them members of the Detaillist. This isaccomplished using the usual ADD/REMOVE commands whichare already available for adding and removing Pipe and Branchelements of the Detaillist.

Examples: CHECK /SITE2-1 /PIPE-2-2-1

Checks named elements only.

CHECK ALL

Checks the current Detail List (see the ADD andREMOVE commands).

CHECK /SITE2-1 /SITE2-2 AS ’REFINER’Checks the two named sites and combines the plot information into a single system isometric with the drawing title ‘REFINER’.

CHECK SHEETN 2 /PIPE-2

Checks sheet 2 of PIPE-2.

CHECK SPOO 2 /PIPE-4

Checks spool 2 of PIPE-4.

12.02:24


CHECK SPOO 2 OF 3 /PIPE-4

Checks spool 2 of sheet 3 of /PIPE-4.

CHECK ISO BASEFLOOR /SITE2-1 /PIPE2-2-1

Checks the named elements of drawing BASEFLOOR.

CHECK PSPOOL2 OF PSLIST1 OF PIPE /013-0001-A150-100

Checks a single PSPOOL.

CHECK PSLIST1 OF PIPE /011-0001-A150-100

Checks a PSPOOL list.

Related Commands: ADD DETAIL REMOVE SPOOLNUMBERS

Command Syntax:

.------------------------------------------.| |

>- CHeck -*- <gid> --------------------------------- || ||- ALL ------------------------------------|| ||- SHEETNumber -+- integer -. || | | || ‘- SINGle --+----. || | ||- SPOOl -+- integ -+- OF integ -| || | | | || | ‘-------------| || | | || ‘-- text --------------+- <gid> -+- AS -+- text-----------.| | | || ‘------+- EQUIpment text-|| |‘-- ISOdrawing - <gid> ---------------------------------------------+->

Restrictions: The maximum number of element identifiers allowed in aCHECK command is 100.

A maximum of 20 CHECK commands are allowed for a singlepipe (sheets or spools). The maximum number of items for anysingle pipe (sheets or spools) is 20. You can only check sheetsfor a Pipe which has previously been detailed with Repeatabilityon, so that split points have been stored in the DESIGNdatabase. See the REPEATABILITY command. Sheets andspools can be specified in the same command as normal pipes.

Querying: Q DETaillist Shows the current content of the Drawlist.

12.02:25


2.3.15 CLLENGTHFILE

Function: Specifies that a pipe centreline length summary, with or withoutan insulation centreline summary, should be output.

Description: ISODRAFT can produce two types of summary which can beoutput to file:

A pipe centreline length summary

A pipe plus insulation centreline length summary

Note: The materials list can also be output to a file using theMATLISTFILENAME command.

Examples: CLLE /FILE1

Produces a pipe centreline length summary only.

CLLE INSU /FILE1

Produces a pipe plus insulation centreline lengthsummary.

CLLE INSU /FILE1 OVER

Produces a pipe plus insulation centreline lengthsummary, overwriting contents of FILE1.

CLLE OFF

Suppresses any further generation of centreline summaryfiles. This is the default state.

Command Syntax:

>--- CLLEngthfile --+----------------.| ||-- INSUlation --+-- filename --+-- OVER ---.| | || ‘-----------|| ||----- OFF* --------------------------------|| |‘-------------------------------------------+--->

Restrictions: Note: That pipe and pipe plus insulation summaries cannotboth be produced in a single run. If either type of file isspecified, the other is suppressed automatically.

Querying: Q CLLENGTHFILE

12.02:26


2.3.16 CONTINUATIONSYMBOLS

2.3.17 CONTNOTES

Function: Plots continuation symbols where pipes are connected tonozzles on plant equipment.

Description: Dotted nozzles can be plotted on isometrics at points whereconnections are made to Plant equipment. This command canonly be used for combined or erection-only isometrics.

The default is that nozzles will not be plotted.

Examples: CONT NOZZles

Plots dotted nozzles.

CONT OFF

Switches dotted nozzle plotting off.

Command Syntax: >--- CONTinuationsymbols ---+--- NOZZles ---.| |‘--- OFF * -----+--->

Querying: Q CONTinuationsymbolsQ OPTIONS

Function: Specifies continuation notes at the end points on drawings forwhen the drawing continues onto another isometric (as opposedto when the drawing continues onto another sheet of the sameisometric).

Description: The note can include the name of the continuation pipe,drawing, or both, as defined by the SPOOLER module. If thetermination point on the current isometric is a weld, you caninclude a description of the connecting component or tube in thenotes.

Examples: CONTN PI

Continuation notes show pipe names only.

CONTN BO DESC ON

Continuation notes show both pipe and drawing names, and will include descriptions for welds of the connecting component.

Command Syntax: >- CONTNotes -+-- PIpe --.| ||-- DRwg --|| |‘-- BOth --+- DESCriptions -+-- ON ---.

| | || ‘-- OFF --|| |‘--------------------------+-->

12.02:27


2.3.18 CONTSHEETS

Function: Allows you to specify that the sheet number of the continuationsheets be shown.

Description: When an isometric continues onto another sheet theCONSHEETS commands specifies that the sheet number ofthe continuation sheet be shown at the sheet break.

Examples: CONTSHEETS ON

Continuation sheets numbers between sheets areswitched on.

CONTSHEETS OFF

Continuation sheets numbers between sheets aresuppressed.

An extra clause, ContUdefText (continuation user-defined text),is available to the CONTSHEETS command to specify thatfurther pipeline attribute or user-defined attribute (UDA)information may be shown as part of the continuation sheetinformation displayed at sheet breaks. The format of theconstructed text string is controlled by the User and maycontain arbitrary text and carriage returns:

CONTSHEETS ON ContUdefText 'LATTR1''arbtext1''LATTR2''arbtext2'''

where LATTR1 and LATTR2 are valid Pipeline attributes andarbtext1 and arbtext2 are two arbitrary text strings. The sheetnumber of the continuation sheet is automatically appended tothe user-specified string. Therefore, the example specifiedabove would output the string XXXXarbtext1YYYYarbtext2n forcontinuation sheet n where XXXX is the value of LATTR1 andYYYY is the value of LATTR2.

This may be accomplished automatically by a new text box onthe Annotation Options window. In the text box the User is ableto add something like:-

LATRR1'/'LATTR2'-'

where LATRR1 and LATTR2 are valid Pipeline attributes• This will generate XXXX/YYYY-n for sheet n where XXXX

is the value of LATTR1 and YYYY is the value of LATTR2.

A more concrete example of the use of the CONTNOTES,ContUdefText option (combined with the COORDINATESoption) is as follows. The specified options:

12.02:28


2.3.19 CONTWELDS

Coords ON AT SheetContSheets ON ContUdefText '''Name=''NAME''Type=''TYPE''&/Lock=''LOCK'' Owner=''OWNER'' PSPE=''PSPE'' pg'''

will display at the sheet break of an isometric:

E 12250N 13500EL +2735Name =100-C-10 Type=PIPELock= Owner=PIPES PSPE=A3B pg3

The COORDINATES option specifies the output of the first three lines. The user-defined text occupies the last two lines because a carriage return '&/' is specified. The value of the 'Lock' attribute is not output because, in this case, it is invalid. The continuation sheet page 3 specified indicates that this text would be expected to be located on sheet 2 of an isometric at the sheet break continuing onto sheet 3.

Note: The CONTSHEETS command must not be confusedwith the CONTNOTES command which specifiescontinuation notes at the end points on drawings whenthe connection goes to another isometric.

Note: A valid non-null string specified by the ContUdefTextoption will always be output at sheets breaks,irrespective of whether the CONTSHEETS option,specifying whether the continuation sheet number isdisplayed or not, is set to ON or OFF.

Command Syntax: >---CONTSheets---+--ON---.| |‘--OFF--+--->

Function: Allows you to plot welds on the current isometric that are tobelong to another drawing.

Description: When an isometric continues onto another sheet and theconnecting item is a weld, you can use the CONTWELDScommand to plot that weld on the current isometric.

When plotted on the current isometric, the continuing weld willbe given a letter identifier instead of a number identifier. Thistells you that the weld actually belongs to another drawing.

Examples: CONTW ON Switches continuation notes for welds on.

Command Syntax: >---CONTWelds---+--ON---.| |‘--OFF--+--->

12.02:29


2.3.20 COORDINATES or COORDS

Function: Specifies the drawing locations at which spatial coordinates areto be shown.

Description: Spatial coordinates are shown on the drawing, by default, at allpipe termination or connection points. You can stop coordinatesbeing plotted at specified types of location on the isometric.

Examples: COORDS OFF

No end coordinates will be shown.

COORDS ONCOORDS DEFAULT

All end coordinates will be shown.

COORDS ON AT PIPE NOZZ VENT

End coordinates will be shown only at pipe continuations,Nozzle connections and Vents.

COORDS ON AT MISCELLANEOUS

End coordinates will only be shown at end locations whichare not any of the following: Pipe, Nozzle, Open, Clos,Vent or Dran. For example, coordinates will be shown atan unconnected flange.

COORDS OFF AT VENT DRAN CLOS

Suppresses coordinates at the specified types ofcomponent. Coordinates will be plotted at all other types ofpipe termination or connection.

COORDS ON AT SHEET

Specify that spatial coordinates are to be shown at sheetbreak on the same isometric.

Related Commands:

ELEVATIONS

Command Syntax:

12.02:30


2.3.21 CUTBACK

>--+-- COORdinates --.| |‘-- COORDS --------+-- ON ---. .-----------------.

| | / ||-- OFF --+-- AT --*-- PIPE -----------|| | | || | |-- NOZZle ---------|| | | || | |-- OPEN -----------|| | | || | |-- CLOSe ----------|| | | || | |-- VENT -----------|| | | || | |-- DRAN -----------|| | | || | |-- SHEET ----------|| | | || | ‘-- MISCellaneous --|| | || ‘----------------------------|| |‘-- DEFault ---------------------------+-->

Querying: Q COORdinatesQ COORDSQ OPTions

Function: To make sure there is sufficient length between a pulled bendand the end of the pipe to be gripped by the bending machineand that a pipe with a threaded end is long enough to be grippedby the threading, machine.

Description: This command adds length to a cut pipe, where necessary, thatwill be cut back after the fabrication work is finished. Additionallength will be added to cut pipes where either:

·The length between a pulled bend and the end of the pipe isinsufficient to allow the bending machine to grip the pipe.

·The length of a pipe that is to have a threaded end is insufficientto be gripped by the threading machine.

The software checks the distance between the p-arrive or p-leave of the pulled bend and the start or end of the pipe (or thelength of the pipe to be threaded). If this is found to be less thanthe minimum grip length, the length of pipe required to give thislength is added to the total length of the cut pipe.

Note: If two adjacent bends are closer than the minimum griplength then a warning message is written into themessage file.

The ATEXTs 186 (CUT START) and 187 (CUT END) are outputto the remarks column of the ‘Cutting List’ on the isometric, or tothe ‘Special Req.’ column of the ‘Cut Pipe List File’, whenappropriate.

12.02:31


The minimum grip length required to handle these pipessuccessfully depends on a number of factors, such as: boresize; pipe material; type of machine; etc. To handle thesevarying factors PDMS rules are used.

Examples: CUTBack 150 ON ALL BEND WITH (SPREF EQ/name)

This associates the minimum grip length with cataloguedata.

CUTB 2 INCH ON ALL BENDS WITH (ABOR GE 100 AND ABOR LT 200)

This sets a minimum grip length of 2 inches for all bends inpipes with bores between 100 and 200mm.

CUTB 200 ON ALL BEND

This syntax can be used as the last rule or a catch all toensure that all bends have at least a 200mm grip length.

Note: At a bend ISODRAFT will use the first rule it finds forwhich the expression is TRUE, therefore the order of therules is important.

CUTBack 175 ON THREAD

This ensures that any cut pipe with a threaded end isalways at least 175mm in length.

Command Syntax:

>- CUTBack -+- value - ON -+- ALL BEND -+- WITH - (logical expression) -.| | | || | ‘-------------------------------|| | || ‘- THREADedends -----------------------------|| |‘- NONE* ---------------------------------------------------+->

value is the minimum grip length. It may be input in mm orinches.

logical expression may be any logical PML expression, from the‘PML 1 Expression Handler’. For more details refer to‘expressions’ in the on-line help. This syntax may be usedrepeatedly to build up an unlimited number of rules.

Querying: Q CUTBack

Outputs a list of defined cutback rules or ‘none’ if no rules aredefined.

Q CUTBack RULE COUNT

Outputs the number of cutback rules that have been defined.

QCUTBack RULE <int>

Outputs the rule identified by the <int> number.

12.02:32


2.3.22 CUTMARKS

Function: Draws cut marks at each corner of the overall sheet area.

Description: The CUTMARKS command draws right-angled cut marks ateach corner of the overall sheet area. When multiple plots aredefined on the same drawing sheet, cutting marks will besuperimposed. The default is CUTMARKS OFF

Figure 2:1. The location of cutting marks

Figure 2:2. Cutting marks on multiple plots

Examples: CUTMarks ONCUTMarks OFF

Command Syntax: >--- CUTMarks ---+--- ON -----.| |‘--- OFF* ---+--->

Querying: Q CUTMARKSQ OPTIONS

Cut MarksCut Marks

12.02:33


2.3.23 CUTPIPELISTFILE

Function: Outputs a cut pipe list to a file.

• Description: A cut pipe report can be output as a comma separated value(*.csv) file. The information normally output for a pipe is:

• Itemcode• Item description and specification• Bore• Cut length• Calculated length (ignoring end preparation allowances

etc.)• Special requirements (e.g. pulled bends, loose flanges,

etc.)• Cut piece number• Pipeline reference• Batch reference, i.e. the Zone name.• End preparations• Spool number

The dimensional units and date format used in the report can bedefined by using the UNITS and DATE commands.

The format of the report file can also be customised to show onlythe information you wish to see. This is done by defining aformat file, in comma separated value (*.csv) format, whichreads in the report file and lays it out to your specification. Theformat file must contain the following information:

• Flags to retain .csv file, create formatted report, createappware macro

• Flags to include Fortran carriage controls, paging, date• File header• File footer• Page length• Order of requested columns• Column titles• Column widths• Columns spacing

The format files can only be created using the appware byspecifying the layout in the isometric option files.

Examples: CUTPipelistfile /PIPELIST

This writes the list of cut pipes into a file named‘PIPELIST’, using the standard format.

12.02:34


2.3.24 CUTTINGLIST

CUTP /FILE1 OVER

Writes the cut pipe list to a file named FILE1, over writingthe existing contents of FILE1.

CUTP OFF

Cut pipe reports are not produced. This is the default.

CUTP /FILE4 OVER FORMATfilename /FORMAT1

Writes the cut pipe report to a file named FILE4 using theformatting information from file FORMAT1.

Command Syntax:

>- CUTPipelistfile -+- filename -+- OVERwrite --.| | || ‘--------------+- FORMATfilename - name -.| | || ‘-------------------------|| ||- OFF* ----------------------------------------------|| |‘-----------------------------------------------------+->

Querying: Q CUTPIPELISTFILEQ OPTIONS

Function: Adds a list of cut pipe lengths to the material list.

Description: The CUTTINGLIST command adds a list of cut pipe lengths tothe material list. Each separate pipe length is always identifiedby:

• Its cut piece number, enclosed in angled brackets; e.g. <1>.• The pipe bore.• The cut length in mm (e.g. 2219) or feet and inches (e.g.

7’2.5/8”) depending on the type of units selected (see theUNITS command).

For pulled bends, the length measured around the centre line ofthe tube will be included on the cutting list. The RADI attribute ofthe bend must be set.

A length which includes either a loose flange or a field-fit weldwill have a fitting allowance incorporated into the plotted length(see the LOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE command).

• Any special requirements, such as a pulled bend; looseflange; a field-fit weld or cutback allowance, this will behighlighted in the remarks column.

12.02:35


Additionally you can add the following items to the table• Item code for that pipe.• The end preparations for the pipe, according to the

following list:PE• PlainBE• BevelledTH• ThreadedSC• ScrewedSA• Saddled end

Note: These codes are Atexts which can be changed.

Note: Where a pipeline is split over more than one drawing, thecut pipe list on each drawing contains only the pipelengths for that sheet. The default is that the numberingwill follow on from the last number on the precedingdrawing. The cut piece numbering sequence can berestarted from 1 on each continuation drawing by givingthe command CUTTinglist PERDrawing.

Examples: CUTTinglist ON ITEM OFF

This outputs the cut piece list in the material table andswitches the Item Codes OFF.

CUTT PERD ON

This sets the numbering to per drawing.

CUTT OFF

This switches the Cuttinglist off, but does not delete thecurrent settings.

CUTT ON

This switches the cutting list output ON, using the currentsettings.

Note: The default is Off.

CUTT ON PERD ON ITEM ON ENDP ON

This outputs the cut piece list in the material table withboth the Item Code and End Preparation columnsdisplayed, with numbering set to per drawing.

Command Syntax:

12.02:36


2.3.25 DATE

>- CUTTinglist -+- OFF* -+------------------------------------.| | |+- ON ---| || | .------------<------------. || |/ | | ‘--------*- PERDrawing ------+- ON --+ |

| | | || ‘- OFF -+ || | ||- ITEMcodes -------+- ON --+ || | | || ‘- OFF -+ || | ||- ENDpreparations -+- ON --+ || | | || ‘- OFF -' || |‘-------------------------------------+->

Querying: Q CUTTinglistQ OPTions

Function: Specifies the format for showing the date in the drawing’s titleblock.

Description: By default, the date is plotted according to the UK convention.This can be changed to the European or American format, orswitched off completely.

Examples: DATE UK Gives the United Kingdom format:18 OCT 1991

DATE EUR Gives the European format:18/10/1991

DATE USA Gives the United States format:10/18/1991

DATE OFF Switches the date off.

Command Syntax: >--- DATE ---+--- UK* ----.| ||--- EUR ----|| ||--- USA ----|| ||--- OFF ----|| |‘------------+--->

Querying: Q DATEQ OPTions

12.02:37


2.3.26 DELETE

2.3.27 DELIMITER

Function: Deletes an SKEY definition from a symbol library.

Description: There are two forms of the command, depending on whether theSKEY is a standard one or a user-defined one.

Examples: DELEte OLDKey ’keyname’

Deletes a standard SKEY definition.

DELEte NEWKey ’keyname’

Deletes a user-defined SKEY definition.

Related Commands:

SKEY

Command Syntax: >--- DELEte ---+--- OLDKey keyname ---. | | ‘--- NEWKey keyname ---+--->

Function: Specifies which character ISODRAFT recognises as theitemcode suffix delimiter.

Description: Identical components can be distinguished by having a suffixadded to their SPREFs. ISODRAFT normally removes suffixesfrom itemcodes in the material list by recognising the delimitercharacter which separates the suffix from the rest of the SPREF.

The default suffix code delimiter is the colon (:). A componentwith an SPREF of /A1A/TEE.50X50:X will normally appear onthe material list with the itemcode TEE.50X50.

Note: The specification name /A1A/ is also removedautomatically.

Examples: DELIMITERAT

Specifies @ symbol.

DELIMITERCOLON

Specifies : symbol.

DELIMITERPLUS

Specifies + symbol.

DELIMITERDOT

Specifies . symbol.

DELIMITERAND

Specifies & symbol.

12.02:38


2.3.28 DETAIL

Command Syntax: >--- DELImiter ---+--- ATsymbol -------.| ||--- COLONsymbol* ---|| ||--- PLUSsymbol -----|| ||--- DOTsymbol ------|| |‘--- ANDsymbol ------+--->

Querying: Q DELImiterQ OPTions

Function: Generates and plots isometric drawings and material lists.

Description: The DETAIL command followed by one or more elementidentifiers processes the elements given, and produces theisometric drawings and any other reports requested.

The default hierarchy level for plotting on a single isometricdrawing is: a Pipe from the DESIGN database or a spooldrawing from the Fabrication database. Branches or spools/fields can be plotted individually and system isometrics, from ahigher level in the database, can also be output.

More than one pipe or spool drawing can be specified in a singleDETAIL command. The pipes can be specified individually, as ahigh-level element or group, or as members of the Detail List(see the ADD and REMOVE commands).

If a Pipe is detailed with repeatability on, the split points andspool identifiers can be stored in the DESIGN database. In thiscase, individual sheets and spools can be added to the DetailList. See the REPEATABILITY command.

Note: If MARK DETAIL ON is set, the DETA attribute of a pipeis set to TRUE when it is detailed, ISODRAFT will notdetail the pipe again unless MARK IGNORE ON hasbeen specified.

The capability to DETAIL Pipe Spools (PSPOOLs) and PipeSpool Lists (PSLISTs) is available in Isodraft.

All of the functionality available to DETAIL PIPEs andBRANCHes in earlier versions of Isodraft is now also availableto DETAIL PSPOOLs and PSLISTs. Such PSPOOLs andPSLISTs are created in the Pipe Production Checks utility in theDesign module and, after their creation, they are visible beneaththe owning pipe in the Design Explorer. Then they aresubsequently also visible in the Design Explorer in the Isodraftmodule. The PSPOOL or PSLIST may be made the CurrentElement (CE) and then DETAILed in the usual way.

12.02:39


A second way in which PSPOOLs and PSLISTs may beDETAILed is by making them members of the Detaillist. This isaccomplished using the usual ADD/REMOVE commands whichare already available for adding and removing Pipe and Branchelements of the Detaillist.

System Isometrics

Normally, ISODRAFT processes each pipeline or spool drawingseparately. Pipes, or spool drawings, which are connected canbe detailed as a complete, named, system isometric. Forexample:

DETAIL CE AS ‘System Name’

Note: You cannot mix DESIGN and Fabrication databaseelements in the same system isometric.

The system name is plotted, by default, in the pipeline referencebox in the bottom right-hand corner of the drawing. Theindividual pipe names, along with their material and otherspecifications, are plotted at the change point.

If any specification is unchanged throughout the system, it willbe output in the title block in the same way as a normalisometric. If a system consists of only one pipe, its name will beadded to the title block.

The material control file and material list will be produced for thewhole system isometric. It is not possible to produce abreakdown of materials for an individual pipeline, nor will thematerial files include any pipeline header information.

Note: No information is written to the support file for a systemisometric.

Equipment Trims

Although unconnected items cannot be drawn automatically aspart of a system isometric, vessel or equipment trim drawingscomprising a drawing frame, user-positioned text and a materiallist can be produced for material take off using the DETAIL ASEQUIPMENT option. The graphical part of the drawing can thenbe added separately, e.g. as an underlay plot generated inDRAFT.

Groups of components such as blanking flanges, level gauges,relief valves, etc., can be modelled on the basis of one Pipe perNozzle, or per group of Nozzles if connected (such as a levelgauge piped between two Nozzles). Disconnected branches inthe same pipe on different nozzles cannot be grouped. Thecollection of pipes can then be detailed as equipment trim.

In the material list, equipment trim items will be grouped underheadings of the form

NOZZLE REF - A.

12.02:40


By default, item numbering for equipment trims in the materiallist will start at 1 for each Nozzle. To concatenate the lists so thatthe numbering is continuous throughout the sequence ofNozzles, use the EQUIPMENTNUMBERING command.

A split ATTA (that is, an ATTY set to SSSS) positioned at the Tailof an equipment trim Branch will cause a multiple sheet drawingto be produced. Such an ATTA should be positioned so that thesplit comes between two Nozzle groupings.

It is not possible to obtain a cut pipe list on an equipment trimisometric. Cut pipe lists have pointers to individual lengths onthe drawing and so, since equipment trim isometrics are formaterial take off only (with no drawing), a cut pipe list would notbe meaningful.

Examples: DETAIL /SITE2-1 /PIPE-2-2-1

Plots named elements only.

DETAIL ALL

Plots the current Detail List.

DETAIL /SITE2-1 /SITE2-2 AS ’REFINER’

Plots the two sites as a single system iso with the drawingtitle ‘REFINER’.

DETAIL SHEETN 2 /PIPE-2

Replots sheet 2 of PIPE-2.

Note: If a dimension is continued on another sheet, the othersheet will be replotted as well, so that the dimensioninginformation is correct.

DETAIL SHEETN SING /PIPE2

Replots the iso for /PIPE-2 on a single sheet

DETAIL /SPLDRG-2

Plots spool drawing 2 of the Fabrication database.

DETAIL PSPOOL2 OF PSLIST1 OF PIPE /013-0001-A150-100

Plots a single PSPOOL.

DETAIL PSLIST1 OF PIPE /011-0001-A150-100

Plots a PSPOOL list.

Related Commands:

ADD CHECK REMOVE SPOOLNUMBERS

Command Syntax:

12.02:41


2.3.29 DIMDIST

.--------------------------------------------. / |

>- DETail -*- <gid> --------------------------------------|| ||- ALL ----------------------------------------|| ||- SHEETNumber -+- integer -. || | | || ‘- SINGle --+-------. || | |‘- SPOOl -+- integer -+-OF integer -| |

| | | || ‘--------------| || | |‘- text -------------------+- <gid> -+- AS -- text ------.

| | |‘---------+- EQUIpment text --+->

Note: The ‘Spool’ branch in this syntax diagram refers only tospools from the DESIGN database, not Spool Drawingsfrom the SPOOLER module, which you plot using thenormal DETAIL command.

Restrictions: The maximum number of element identifiers allowed in aDETAIL command is 100.

A maximum of 20 DETAIL commands are allowed for a singlepipe (sheets or spools). The maximum number of items for anysingle pipe (sheets or spools) is 20. You can only add sheet andspools for a Pipe which has previously been detailed withRepeatability on, so that split points and spool identifiers havebeen stored in the DESIGN database. See the REPEATABILITYcommand. Normal pipes can be detailed alongside replots.

Querying: Q DEtaillist Shows the current content of the Draw List.

Function: Specifies distance between dimensioning lines and pipe/component centrelines on the isometric plot (standout distance).Normally used to avoid overplotting lines on a complexisometric.

Description: The default standout distances are: string dimensions 11mm;overall dimensions 16mm; support dimensions 6mm.

Note: These standout values may not be set to the same value.Also the skewbox standout distances for dimension linescannot be set to these values and vice versa.

Examples: DIMDIST STRING 15

Sets standout distance for string/composite dimensions to15mm.

DIMDIST STRING 0.5 INCH

Sets standout distance to 0.5 inch.

12.02:42


2.3.30 DIMLABELS

DIMDIST SUPPORTS 10

Sets support dimensioning standout distance to 10mm.

DIMDIST OVERALL 12

Sets overall dimensioning standout distance to 12mm

Related Commands:

DIMENSIONS SUPPORT SKEWBOX

Command Syntax: >--- DIMDist ---+--- STRING* ----.| ||--- OVERall ---|| |‘--- SUPPorts ---+--- value -----.

| |‘--- DEFAULT ---+--->

where value is the standout distance.

Querying: Q DIMDistQ OPTions

Function: Specifies the appearance of dimension labels.

Description: The DIMLABELS commands allows you to control if dimensionlabels are displayed on isometrics within the dimension line orabove the dimension line.

Examples: DIMLABEL IN

Dimension labels are shown within the dimension line(default).

DIMLABEL ABOVE

Dimension labels are shown above the dimension line.

Command Syntax: >--- DIMLabels ---+--- IN ----.| |‘--- ABOVE -+---->

where value is the standout distance.

12.02:43


2.3.31 DIMENSIONS

Function: Specifies dimensioning style.

Description: The basic options for detailed dimensioning are either string orcomposite dimensions.

String dimensioning gives the maximum amount of detail, sinceit shows both the lengths of individual components and theirrelative positions. For assembly purposes (fabrication anderection) string dimensioning often gives more detail than isstrictly necessary and composite dimensioning can be specified.

String dimensions, which are plotted by default, are measuredsequentially from each relevant point to the next. The relevantpoints are:

• The start or end of a branch.• Changes of direction (bends, elbows, etc).

Component connection points (flanges, welds, screwed andcompression joints etc, excluding gaskets).

Composite dimensions ignore dimensions over which thefabricator has no control, particularly the sizes of individualcomponents. Components which are directly connected to theeach other are therefore dimensioned as though they constitutea single composite item.

Only non-flanged components, that is, those with welded,screwed or compression fittings, are considered as connectedwhen calculating composite dimensions. Flanges are alwaystreated as breaks in the pipeline and dimensioned separately.

Fittings which are attached to pipe only at one end are treatedas composite with the fitting at the other end. Fittings which areattached to pipe at both ends are dimensioned to the arrive p-point, with two exceptions:

• Reducers are dimensioned to the larger end;• Tees are dimensioned to the centreline of the off branch.

Composite dimensions are always broken at a Tee or Oletintersection point.

You can display overall dimensions in addition to string orcomposite dimensions. The default standout for overalldimensions is 16mm. Overall dimensions are taken:

• From the start of a branch to the first change of direction• From each change of direction to the next• From the last change of direction to the end of a branch• From the start of a falling section skew-box to the end of

the skew-box.• Between Branch connections.

12.02:44


Figure 2:3. Dimensioning Methods

Bore sizes will be marked where any confusion might otherwisearise; e.g. at reducers, reducing fittings, tees, crosses, etc.

You can also specify:• Whether or not overall dimensions cross Branch

connections;• Dimensioning to Valve centrelines.

By default, support/hanger dimensions are on the same sideas string dimensions, but they can be on the opposite side. Thedefault standout for support/hanger dimensions is 6mm.

The default settings are:• String dimensioning on (and, therefore, composite

dimensioning off);• Overall dimensioning off;• Support dimensioning on;• Valve centreline dimensioning off;

Support/hanger dimensions shown alongside other pipelinedimensions.

(a) String dimensions (b) Composite dimensions

(c) Overall dimensions

~

~ ~

~

~

~

12.02:45


Examples: DIME ON

Produces isometrics which are fully annotated in stringformat, with both piping and support dimensions. This isthe default setting.

DIME OFF

Produces isometrics with no dimensions plotted.

DIME COMP ON

Produces isometrics with composite dimensions overconnected fittings.

DIME COMP OFF

Produces isometrics with string format dimensions,assuming that dimensioning is still on.

DIME OVER ON

Produces isometrics with overall dimensions on(independent of current setting of string/compositeoptions).

DIME OVER CEN

Produces isometrics with overall dimensions to Valvecentrelines and Branch connections (in addition to stringdimensions).

DIME OVER CENT ONLY

Produces isometrics with overall centreline dimensionsonly.

DIME OVER ON STOP

Produces isometrics with overall dimensions stopping atbranch connections.

DIME OVER ON ACR

Produces isometrics with overall dimensions acrossbranch connections.

DIME OVER CENT STOP

Produces isometrics with overall dimensions to valvecentrelines, stopping at branch connections.

DIME OVER CENT ACR

Produces isometrics with overall dimensions to valvecentrelines and across branch connections.

DIME OVER CRIT

Produces isometrics with overall dimensions to criticalcomponents.

12.02:46


DIME SUPP

Produces isometrics with support dimensions only.

DIME DEFAULT

Resets the dimensioning style to its default state.

Note: That standout distances may not be set to the samevalue.

Related Commands:

DIMDIST SUPPORT TRUNCATE

Restrictions: Overall dimensioning can be specified in addition to string orcomposite dimensioning, but an overall dimension will not beshown if it is the same as a string or composite dimension.

Instruments Tees cannot be included within overall dimensions.

When a Tee or Olet is encountered with its arrive p-point in abranch leg, an overall dimension may not be given for the mainbranch.

Command Syntax:

>- DIMEnsions -+- ON -----------------------------------------------------------.| ||- OFF ----------------------------------------------------------|| ||- SUPport ------------------------------------------------------|| ||- DEFault ------------------------------------------------------|| ||- COMPosite -+- ON --. || | | || ‘- OFF -+------------------------------------------|| ||- OVERall -+- ON ------------------. || | | || |- CENTreline -+- ONLY -| || | | | || | ‘--------+- STOPping -. || | | | || | |- ACRoss ---| || | | | || | ‘------------+- BRANch ------|| | | || | |- CONNections -|| | | || | ‘---------------|| | || |- CRITical -+- ONLY -. || | | | || | ‘--------+------------------------------|| | | | ‘- OFF ----------------------------------------------|| |‘- HANGers -+- OPPosite --. |

| | |‘- ALONgside -+- STRings ---------------------------+>

Querying: Q DIMEnsionsQ OPTions

12.02:47


2.3.32 DISTANCES

Function: Allows you to specify the units to be used for input of lengthsand distances.

Description: The default units for the input of dimensions (i.e. the units whichare assumed if you enter a dimension simply as a value) arenormally derived from the Catalogue. You can change thedefault units independently for input of pipe bores and/ordistances along pipelines or across components by using therelated DISTANCES and BORES commands.

Note: That the UNITS command is used to set output units.

The current default units may be overridden for any specific itemof input data by giving the units explicitly. For example: 5mm.

Examples: MM DISTANCES

Input lengths and distances assumed to be in mm unlessotherwise specified.

INCH DISTANCES

Input lengths and distances assumed to be in inchesunless otherwise specified.

FINCH DISTANCES

Input lengths and distances assumed to be in feet andinches unless otherwise specified (e.g. 5’6 represents 5ft6in).

Related Commands:

BORES

Command Syntax: >---+--- MILlimetre ---.| ||--- MM -----------|| ||--- FInch --------|| |‘--- INch ---------+--- BOres -------.

| |‘--- DIstances ---+--->

Querying: Q UNIts

12.02:48


2.3.33 DTEXTS

Function: Controls the material description part of item descriptions

Description: A complete item description in a material list consists of thegeometric description (derived from the attributes of a DTEXTelement) and the material description (derived from theattributes of an MTEXT element).

The text in MTEXT and DTEXT elements is defined inPARAGON by setting the attributes of MTEXT and DTEXT tothe text required. Both elements have three attributes which cancontain text:

• The three attributes of DTEXT are RTEXT, STEXT andTTEXT;

• The three attributes of MTEXT are XTEXT, YTEXT andZTEXT.

The default attributes whose text will be displayed on thematerial list are RTEXT and XTEXT. If the other attributes havebeen set in the DESIGN database, you can choose to displaythe STEXT or TTEXT using the DTEXT command, and theYTEXT or ZTEXT using the MTEXT command.

The DTEXTS IGNORE command allows you to suppress thegeometric description completely.

Using different attributes can be used, for example, to storedescriptions in different languages.

Examples: DTEXts Stext

Sets the description to the text held in the STEXT attribute.

DTEXts Ttext

Sets the description to the text held in the TTEXT attribute.

DTEXts Rtext

Sets the description to the text held in the XTEXT attribute.This is the default.

Related Commands:

MATERIALLIST MTEXTS

Command Syntax: >--- DTEXts ---+--- Rtext* ---.| ||--- Stext ----|| ||--- Ttext ----|| |‘--- IGNORE ---+--->

Querying: Q DTEXTQ OPTions

12.02:49


2.3.34 ELEVATION

2.3.35 EQUIPMENTNUMBERING

Function: Specifies whether or not elevation coordinates are to be shown on isometrics.

Description: By default, elevations are shown on isometrics at all intersection points where there is a change of elevation. You can change this as shown in the following examples.

Examples: ELEVation VERTIcal

Outputs elevations only on vertical sections of pipe (i.e.linear dimensions are omitted).

ELEVation VERTical AND DIMEnsions

Outputs both elevations and dimensions on verticalsections of pipe.

ELEVation INTERsections

Resets the default condition so that elevations are onlyshown at intersection points where there is a change ofelevation, and dimensions are shown on vertical sectionsof Pipe.

Related Commands:

COORDINATES COORDS DIMENSIONS

Command Syntax:

>-- ELEVation --+-- INTERsections* ----------------------------.| |‘-- VERTical ------+-- AND --. |

| | ||---------+-- DIMEnsions --|| | ‘----------------------------+-->

Querying: Q ELEVationQ OPTions

Function: Controls numbering of items in the material list for an equipmenttrim isometric.

Description: Item numbering in the material list can start at 1 for each Nozzle,which is the default, or the numbering can be sequential for allNozzles.

12.02:50


2.3.36 FALLINGLINES

Examples: EQUIPMENTN LIST

Numbering is continuous through the sequence ofNozzles.

EQUIPMENTN NOZZ

Resets to the default, with each Nozzle having its ownseparate numbering sequence.

Command Syntax: >--- EQUIPMENTNumbering ---+--- NOZZle* ---.| |‘--- LIST ------+--->

Querying: Q EQUIPMENTNumbering

Note: Minimum abbreviation for querying.

Q OPTions

Function: Defines the maximum rate of fall allowed in a pipeline before it isshown as a skew on the isometric plot.

Description: Amounts of fall less than the current fall limit are shown by awedge-shaped symbol on the pipe, together with a note givingthe rate of fall. The wedge-shaped symbols are known as fallarrows. Amounts of fall greater than the current limit are shownas boxed skews. You can change the limit, and the units inwhich it is expressed.

Figure 2:4. Different ways of showing falling lines.

EL +25000

EL +24600

EL +1130

EL +1200

FALL 1 _

Falling line shown as skew Falling line shown by fall arrow

12.02:51


The default accuracy to which ISODRAFT will report the fall isas follows:

• Degrees to the nearest half degree • Ratio to the nearest 1 up to 30; to the nearest 5 above 30 • Percentage to the nearest 1% • Grads to the nearest half grad • Metric inclination to the nearest 10mm per metre

• Imperial inclination to the nearest 1/16” per foot

Note: That if the slope is less than 1:500 (or its equivalent indegrees, etc) the fall note will not be output.

You can specify different accuracy values for reporting the fallusing the ACCURACYLEVEL value command (where value canbe zero, 1 or 2). The accuracies you can specify are:

value (for eachrepresentation)

0 1 2

degrees default 0.1 0.01

ratio default 1 always 1 always

percentage default 0.1 0.01

grads default 0.1 0.01

metric default 1mm/m 0.1mm/m

imperial default 1/16”/10’ 1/16”/100’

If you set an accuracy level and then wish to go back to thedefault settings, you must give an appropriateACCURACYLEVEL command with a value of zero.

If the fall units are specified but the value of the fall limit isomitted, the following default values will be used. Thesecorrespond to approximately the same slope:

FALL DEG will default to FALL DEG 5 i.e. 5 degrees

FALL RAT will default to FALL RAT 11 i.e. a ratio of 1:11

FALL PER will default to FALL PER 9 i.e. a slope of 9%

FALL GRA will default to FALL GRA 5 i.e. 5 grads

12.02:52


FALL MET will default to FALL MET 80 i.e. 80mm permetre

FALL IMP will default to FALL IMP 1 i.e. 1/16 inch perfoot

The overall default setting, if no fall units or limit are specified, isFALL DEG 5.

Where a falling section includes an in-line component, such as aValve or Reducer, the FALL message will appear only once,against the first section of the slope. Where a falling sectionincorporates a Tee, the FALL message will be shown twice, onboth sides of the Tee.

Figure 2:5. Falls in sections of pipe containing components.

Examples: FALL RATIO 20 Sets fall limit to 1:20

FALL RATIO Resets fall limit to ratio default of 1:11.

FALLPERCENT 2

Sets fall limit to 2%.

FALLPERCENT

Resets fall limit to percentage default of 9%.

FALL OFF All falls shown as boxed skews; fall symbolnot used at all.

FALL 1.4 DEG Sets fall limit to 1.5 degrees.

FALL RAT 1:40 Sets fall limit to 1:40.

FALL PER2.7%

Sets fall limit to 3% (to nearest per cent).

FALL GRAD1.6

Sets fall limit to 1.5 grad.

EL +1130

EL +1200

FALL 1 _

3 X 3" NS

2010

600

203

1093

3 X 3" NS

FALL 1 _EL +1163

12.02:53


2.3.37 FALLSKEWS

FALL MET 30 Sets fall limit to a metric incline of 30mm/m.

FALL IMP 5/16” Sets fall limit to an imperial incline of 5/16” perft.

FALL MET 30ACC 1

Sets fall limit to a metric incline of 30mm/mwith a reporting accuracy of 1mm per metre.

Related Commands:

ANGLEACCURACY FALLSKEWS SKEWBOXZEROLENGTHSKEWS

Command Syntax:

>- FALLinglines -+- DEG --------.| ||- RATio ------|| ||- PERcentage -|| ||- GRAds ------|| ||- IMPerial ---|| ||- METric -----+- value --.| | || | |- ACCuracylevel value -.| | | || ‘----------+-----------------------|| |‘- OFF -------------------------------------------+->

Querying: Q FALLinglinesQ OPTions

Function: Controls how dimensioning boxes for skewed and fallingpipelines are shown.

Description: Dimensioning boxes for skewed and falling pipelines are bydefault shown by 3D skewboxes, that is boxes showing thehorizontal skew and the fall. Skewed and falling pipelines withrates of fall less than the current fall (set by the FALLINGLINEScommand) can be shown as a 2D skewbox for the horizontalskew and a fall indicator showing the amount of fall.

Skewboxes can be suppressed completely for branchescontaining less than a specified number of components. Skewbox suppression applies only until a change of direction isencountered.

Examples: FALLSkews THREEDbox ON

Displays skewed and falling lines with 3D boxes. This isthe default.

12.02:54


2.3.38 FILE

FALLSkews TWODbox ON

Displays skewed and falling lines with 2D boxes for thehorizontal skew and a FALL indicator giving the amount offall.

FALLSkews TWODbox OFF 4

Displays skews as 2D boxes (with FALL indicators), butomits boxes on branch legs which have four or lesscomponents.

Note: This component count excludes gaskets but includeseach length of implied tubing. The number ofcomponents must be between 1 and 50 inclusive.

Related Commands:

FALLINGLINES OVERALLSKEWS SKEWBOX ZEROLENGTHSKEWS

Command Syntax:

>--- FALLSkews ---+--- THREEDbox ---.| | ‘--- TWODbox -----+--- ON --------------.

| ||--- OFF --- value ---|| |‘---------------------+--->

Function: Specifies the name of a PLOT file to which ISODRAFT’sisometric drawing output is to be sent. The command can alsobe used to produce files in DXF, PDF, Image or EMF (EnhancedWindows Metafile) format or to automatically print the isometric.The command also allows the setting of various options tocontrol the production and format of the output.

Description: The FILE command specifies the name of the PLOT file forISODRAFT output. ISODRAFT adds a three-digit number,jumping over any numbers which already exist. If DXF, PDF,image or EMF output is requested, the suffixes .dxf, .pdf, (.tif,.bmp, .jpg, .png, .dif), .emf will be added respectively after thenumber.

Note: The numbering ignores the file extensions. For example,if a file named /PLOT001 exists, the next file created willbe /PLOT002 or /PLOT002.dxf or /PLOT002.pdf etc.

12.02:55


If the same file command is used to produce all the file types,they will all have the same numeric suffix. For example, if thelast PLOT file was /PLOT004 and the last DXF and PDF filewere /PLOT002.dxf and /PLOT002.pdf respectively, and all theplot types are required for the next DETAIL command, theoutput will be /PLOT005 and /PLOT005.dxf, /PLOT005.pdf, /PLOT005.tif, /PLOT005.emf.

By default, each DETAIL command will produce one PLOT file.If several pipes are specified in a DETAIL command, the usercan specify that each plot will be in a separate file.

If a pipe is too complicated to be shown on one plot, or the userhas specified that the pipe should be split over more than onesheet, separate PLOT files can be produced. If the user wantsthe PLOT file to contain more than one drawing the user canspecify a multiple PLOT file, and in this case the user can alsospecify the length of paper available. ISODRAFT willautomatically create a new multiple PLOT file when the paperlength has been exceeded.

The PDMS limitation on plotting size is 3275mm2 and thiscannot be exceeded in either single or multiple file mode.

DXF

If Kanji output is required, the FILE command also allows theuser to specify the dxf file as SHIFTJIS format (mostly used onIBM PCs) or EUC format (used on most other machines).

Details of outputting .dxf format files to MicroStation are given inRecommendations for Importing DXF files from IISODRAFT intoMicroStation).

The following operations may be implemented by using the FILESET command, an extension to the FILE command.

PDF Option to launch the Adobe reader forviewingOption to compress output files

Printing Option to rotate and expand or reduce to fitthe sheetOption to control the printer dialogue

Image files Option to select the file type as Tif, Tif/LZW,TIF/G4 Jpg, Bmp, Png or GifOption to set a reduction factor

EMF No special options

12.02:56


In addition, the FILE SET command allows the specification ofthe colour mode and minimum line width for each file type andthe separating of the isometric sheets into individual files forcertain file types. The available colour modes are Standard,Black and White, Grayscale and Colourplus. Colourplus adjustsall black/white and gray colours to black and white to give thegreatest contrast against the background.

Examples: FILE /P250-BDF

Specifies the filename /P250-BDF. PLOT files will benamed /P250-BDF001, /P250-BDF002, etc.

FILE AND DXF /P250-BDF

Specifies the filename /P250-BDF for both the PLOT fileand the dxf file.

FILE DXF EUC /P250-BDF

Specifies that the PLOT file will be in DXF EUC format.The suffix .dxf is added to the filename automatically.

Note: That on VAX, this will override the normal VAX filenameextension.

FILE /PLOT MULT

Specifies that the file named /PLOT can contain multipleplots. This is the default.

FILE /PLOT MULT 2000

Specifies that the file named /PLOT can contain multipleplots, and gives the maximum length of paper.

FILE AND DXF PDF PRINT IMAGE EMF “plot” SINGLE

Creates the isometric of the selected pipe in all the formattypes - plot DXF, PDF, chosen Image type, EMF, and printsthe plot files.

FILE SET PDF Noview Nocomp Colourplus Bindpages

Creates a PDF file with ‘Colourplus’ as the colour modeand with all the sheets in one file. Viewing andcompressing the file are switched off.

FILE SET PDF View Comp Colourplus Minl 2 Nobindpages

Creates a compressed PDF file with ‘Colourplus’ as thecolour mode, with one file for each sheet. The PDF file canbe viewed as soon as the isometric is created. A minimumline width of 2 is added.

12.02:57


FILE SET PRINT Reducetofit NODialog Colourplus Bindpages

Prints the plot file which is set to the ‘reduce to fit’ option.The other options being - no fit, expand and reduceexpand. The printer settings are set to show no dialogBox.

FILE SET PRINT Expandtofit Dialog Colourplus Minl 2 Bindpages

Prints the plot file which is set to the ‘expand to fit’ option.The printer settings are set to show no dialog Box. Aminimum line width of 2 is added for all the lines.

FILE SET IMAGE TIFGFOUR Colourplus Bindpages

A TIF_G4 type image is created with ‘Colourplus’ as thecolour mode and with all the sheets in one file.

FILE SET IMAGE TIFGFOUR Reduce 0.11 Colourplus Minl 5 Nobindpages

A TIF_G4 type image is created with ‘Colourplus’ as thecolour mode and with one sheet in one file. A minimumline width of 5 is added along with an image reductionfactor of 0.11.

FILE SET EMF Colourplus Bindpages

Creates an EMF file with ‘Colourplus’ as the colour mode.

FILE SET EMF Colourplus Minl 6 Bindpages

Creates an EMF file with ‘Colourplus’ as the colour modeand a minimum line width of 6 is added.

Command Syntax:

>- FILE -+- AND -.| |+-------+- DXF -.| | || '-------+- SHIFTJIS -.| | || +- EUC ------|| | || ‘------------| .---<---.| | / |‘----------------------------+-*- PDF ---|

| |+- PRINT -|| |+- IMAGE -|| |+- EMF ---|| |‘---------+- filename -+- SINGle -------------.

| |+-- MULTIple -+- value -|| | || ‘---------|| || |‘-----------------------+->

where value is the maximum length of the plotter’s paper roll inmillimetres.

12.02:58


>- FILE -+- SET -+- PDF ---+- VIEW ---.| | | || | +- NOVIEW -|V | | |

| '----------+- COMPRESS -.| | || +- NOCOMP ---|| | || '------------+--------.| |+- PRINT -+- NOFIT -------. || | | || +- REDUCETOFIT -| || | | || +- EXPANDTOFIT -| || | | || +- ALLFIT ------| || | | || '--------------+- DIALOG ----. || | | || +- NODIALOG -| || | | || +- ONEDIALOG -| || | | || '-------------+--|+- IMAGE -+- TIF ------. || | | || +- TIFLZW ---| || | | || +- TIFGFOUR -| || | | || +- JPG ------| || | | || +- BMP ------| || | | || +- GIF ------| || | | || +- PNG ------| || | | || '------------+- REDUCE uval -. || | | || '---------------+---|| |'- EMF ------------------------------------+--> COLOURPLUS etc

where uval is the reduction factor that ranges from (0.01 - 0.99).

>--+- COLOURPLUS -.| |+- BW ---------|| |+- GRAYSCALE --|| |+- STANDARD ---|| |'--------------+- MINLINEWIDTH uval -.

| |'---------------------+- BINDPAGES ---.

| |+- NOBINDPAGES -|| |'---------------+-->

where uval is the minimum line width in millimetres ranging from0.01 - 9.99.

Querying: Q OUTPUTQ OUTPUT PDFQ OUTPUT PRINTQ OUTPUT IMAGEQ OUTPUT EMFQ OPTIONS

12.02:59


2.3.39 FLOWARROWS

Function: Allows flow arrows to be shown on isometric plots.

Description: Flow arrows are normally shown for inline components. Inlineflow arrows can also be plotted in any length of tube if anattachment point (ATTA) with its ATTY attribute set to FLOW hasbeen created in the DESIGN module. You can also instructISODRAFT to include automatic flow arrows by using theAUTOMATIC command.

The AUTOMATIC command uses the value of the branchFLOWDIRECTION attribute described in Data Model ReferenceManual.

The settings for FLOWD are:• BACK for flow from tail to head • FORW for flow from head to tail. • OFF to allow the arrows to be turned off • BOTH to indicate a two-way flow. • Any other setting will continue to be treated as FORWard.

Automatic flow arrows are output for each branch, and at eachmulti-way component, provided that a length of implied tube isavailable to take the arrow. The automatic flow arrows option willalso output any FLOW ATTAs.

By default, the inline flow arrow option is set to off, so that flowarrows for tube are not normally shown.

Each type can be plotted independently, and the inline flowarrows can be scaled.

By default the arrows point in the direction HEAD to TAIL; i.e.FORWARD. They can be reversed by changing the branchFLOW attribute to BACKWARD.

Examples: FLOWarrows ON

Flow arrows will be plotted for components.

FLOWarrows OFF

Flow arrows will not be plotted for components.

FLOWarrows INline ON

Flow arrows will be plotted for Flow ATTAs in tube.

FLOWarrows INline OFF

Flow arrows will not be plotted for Flow ATTAs in tube.

12.02:60


2.3.40 FRAME

FLOWarrows INline SCAle 10

Inline flow arrows will be scaled by a factor of 10. Thedefault scale factor is 8. The scale must be an integerbetween 5 and 15 inclusive.

FLOWarrows INline SCAle 10 AUTO

Inline flow arrows will be scaled by a factor of 10 andadded automatically. The default scale factor is 8. Thescale must be an integer between 5 and 15 inclusive.

Command Syntax:

.---------------------<----------------------. / |

>- FLOWarrows --+------------+-- ON* --------------------------|| | || ‘-- OFF --------------------------|| |‘-- INline --+-- ON ------------. |

| | ||-- SCAle-integer--+- AUTOmatic --|| | || ‘--------------|| |‘-- OFF* -------------------------+-->

Querying: Q FLOWarrowsQ OPTions

Function: Specifies whether or not drawing frame lines and text are to bedrawn.

Description: By default, ISODRAFT plots a frame around the completedrawing within the predefined margins, together with separatinglines between the different areas. Frame text and line summarysymbols are also plotted.

The FRAME command allows you to switch these features off oron.

Related Commands:

CUTMARKS MARGIN

Command Syntax: >--- FRAMe ---+--- ON* ---.| |‘--- OFF ---+--->

Querying: Q FRAMeQ OPTions

12.02:61


2.3.41 INSTALL SETUP

2.3.42 INSTNAME

Function: Produces the screen layout stored in a file created by theRECREATE command.

Description: On workstations, you can use the RECREATE command tosave the screen layout, which can then be read in again usingthe INSTALL SETUP command.

Examples: RECReate /DISP

Saves the screen display in a file named /DISP.

INSTALL SETUP /DISP

Restores the screen display stored in the file /DISP.

Related Commands:

RECREATE

Command Syntax: >--- INSTALL SETUP filename --->

Function: Controls two options relating to the display of Instruments:• Defines whether SPREFs or PDMS names are to be used

as itemcodes for instruments in the material list.• Allows you to identify instruments on the isometric plot by

tagging them with their names enclosed in circles(balloons).

Description: By default, an instrument is identified in the material list byhaving its SPREF as its itemcode. You can specify instead thatthe instrument’s name will be appended to its description,because an instrument reference may require more charactersthan the itemcode format permits. In this case the itemcodecolumn will be left blank.

When an instrument is referenced by name, the name can bedisplayed in a circular balloon next to the plotted symbol on theisometric. By default, instruments are not tagged with theirnames in balloons, even if they are identified by name in thematerial list. The size of the balloon is given by specifying themaximum number of characters per line of text in the balloon.

Examples: INSTN NAME

Instruments identified in material list by names appendedto descriptions. The itemcode column is left blank(default).

12.02:62


2.3.43 INSULATIONCONTROL

INSTN SPREF

Instruments identified in material list by using SPREFs asitemcodes.

INSTN NAME WITH BALL OFF

Instruments identified in material list by name, but withouttagging with name balloons on plot.

INSTN NAME WITH BALLOONS SIZE 4

Identifies all instrument symbols on the isometric withballoons containing the instrument names in a 4-characters-per-line format.

Related Commands:

TAGGING

Command Syntax:

>- INSTName -+- NAMe* -+- WITH -.| | || |--------+- BALLoons -+- SIZE - integer -.| | | || | ‘- OFF ------------|| | || ‘----------------------------------------|| |‘- SPRef ------------------------------------------+->

Querying: Q INSTNAMEQ OPTions

Function: Specifies whether or not insulation is to be plotted.

Description: Any piping component which has its ISPEC attribute set may beshown insulated. The start and end points of insulatedcomponents will be shown on the isometric.

Insulation and tracing can be shown:• On tubing only• On tubing and pipe components

The name of the insulation and/or tracing specification will beshown in the title block.

Examples: INSU ON Display insulation.

INSU TUBE Show insulation on the tube only, not on thepipe components.

INSU ALL Show insulation on both tube andcomponents.

INSU OFF Suppress the display of insulation.

12.02:63


2.3.44 ISO

The default is INSULATIONCONTROL TUBE.

Related Commands:

TRACINGCONTROL

Command Syntax: >------ INSUlationcontrol ----+---- ON* ----.| ||---- TUBE ---|| ||---- ALL ----|| |‘---- OFF ----+--->

Querying: Q INSUlationcontrolQ OPTions

Function: Defines the view direction to be used for generating theisometric plot.

Description: The ISO command defines which of the four standard isometricviewing directions will be used for the isometric plot. An arrow isplaced on the plot to show north.

The BOX option will plot a box round the north arrow.

The default view direction is ISO 3 (i.e. North at the top left-handcorner of the drawing).

Examples: ISO 1 North at bottom right-hand corner

ISO 2 North at top right-hand corner

ISO 3 * North at top left-hand corner

ISO 4 North at bottom left-hand corner

ISO 4 BOX North at bottom left-hand corner, with a box

round the arrow

Command Syntax: >--- ISO --- value ---+-----------.| |‘--- BOX ---+--->

where value is 1, 2, 3 or 4.

Querying: Q ISOQ OPTions

12.02:64


2.3.45 ISOTYPE

Function: Defines whether the isometric will show fabrication information, erection information, or both.

Description The ISOTYPE command specifies whether the information onthe drawing is intended for:

• In-shop fabrication and on-site erection• In-shop fabrication• On-site erection• In-shop fabrication of pipe spools

A combined fabrication-erection isometric is a fullydimensioned and annotated isometric drawing with a materiallist specifying all piping components, bolts etc. This is thedefault.

A fabrication-only isometric is similar to the combined formatexcept that the following information is omitted:

• The coordinates of Plant locations• Erection materials• CONNected TO and CONTinued ON comments at pipeline

ends

The erection-only isometric is similar to the combined formatexcept that all fabrication materials, apart from loose flanges,are omitted from the materials list.

A spool isometric only shows fabrication information. Looseflanges will be included on spools, with the note ‘tack weld only’,if they have a SHOP attribute set to TRUE.

ISODRAFT automatically allocates spool break points at flangesor flanged components, field welds and erection materials, thatis items with their SHOP flag set to FALSE.

All components, including Tube, must have their SHOPattributes set to TRUE if spool break points are to be correctlyallocated. (The default setting for tube is FALSE, which wouldcause lengths of implied tube to be omitted when ISODRAFTcalculates spool dimensions.)

A spool number, automatically allocated by ISODRAFT, will beplotted after the pipeline reference in the title block of eachdrawing. For example,

• 100-A-8 SPL[1].

A separate isometric drawing will be produced for each pipespool.

12.02:65


2.3.46 ITEMCODE (1)

Sheets with Blank Drawing Areas. Any type of the isometriccan be produced with the actual drawing area left blank, that is,only the material list will be plotted.

If ISOTYPE NONE is specified, no plot will be produced. Youmust specify output to text files, such as a material list, to getany output at all.

Command Syntax:

>-- ISOType --+-- COMBined* --+-- ERECtion ------.| | || |-- FABrication ---|| | || ‘------------------|| ||-- ERECtion --+-- FABrication ----|| | || ‘-------------------|| ||-- FABrication -------------------|| ||-- SPOOl -------------------------+-- NOPicture ---.| | || ‘----------------|| |‘--- NONe ------------------------------------------+->

Querying: Q ISOTypeQ OPTions

Function: Allows you to label certain types of fitting with their itemcodes onthe isometric drawing.

Description: By default, itemcodes for piping components are shown only inthe material list.

For in-line fittings of generic types INST, VALV, FILT, PCOM,TRAP or VENT, you can specify that itemcodes are also shownagainst the corresponding component symbols on the isometricplot.

You can also specify that itemcodes are not to be shown at all.

Examples: ITEM INST TRAP ON

Itemcodes for Instruments and Traps shown againstplotted symbols and in material list; codes for all othercomponent types shown in material list only.

ITEM TRAP VENT OFF

Itemcodes for Traps and Vents not shown at all; codes forall other component types shown in material list only.

12.02:66


2.3.47 ITEMCODE (2)

ITEM ALL ON

Itemcodes for all valid component types shown againstplotted symbols and in mate Itemcodes for all types ofcomponent shown in material list only.

ITEM OFF

Itemcodes are shown only in the material list.

Related Commands:

TAGGING

Command Syntax: .--------<--------. / |

>--- ITEMcode ---*--- fittingtype --|| |‘--- ALL ----------+--- ON --------.

| ||--- OFF* ------|| |‘--- DEFault ---+--->

where fittingtype is any of INST, VALV, FILT, PCOM, TRAP, orVENT.

Querying: Q ITEMCODEQ OPTions

Function: Specifies whether or not specification names are to be includedin material list itemcodes, and whether items which have thesame itemcode except for the specification name and suffix aretreated as the same item.

Description: By default, itemcodes shown in the material list do not includethe name of the Specification from which the material data hasbeen extracted. This is known as a short itemcode. TheITEMCODE LENGTH command allows you to use the fullSPCOM, which includes the SPEC name but excludes thesuffix, as the itemcode.

By default, ISODRAFT removes any itemcode suffixes beforecomparing itemcodes for totalling in the material list. TheSEPARATE option allows itemcodes to be compared before thespecification name and suffix are removed, thus allowingitemcodes to be listed separately with different descriptions.

You can set up multiple itemcodes for elements in the DESIGNdatabase by creating user-defined attributes (UDAs) for theSPCOM of the element. For bolts, the UDAs are created asattributes of a DTAB element. You can then use the ITEMCODEcommand to specify that the itemcode should be taken from aUDA instead of from the SPCOM.

12.02:67


The Item Code for a Support may be derived from a StandardText Attribute, Text UDA or Property of the ATTA itself ratherthan from its SPCOM.

Examples: ITEMCODE LENGTH LONG

Itemcodes to include SPEC name.

ITEMCODE LENGTH SHORT

Itemcodes to exclude SPEC name.

ITEMCODE TOTAL

Itemcodes which are the same except for the specificationname and suffix are totalled.

ITEMCODE SEPARATE

Itemcodes which are the same except for the specificationname and suffix are listed separately.

ITEMCODE FROM :ABC

Itemcodes to be taken from the UDA named :ABC. TheUDA must exist for SPCOMs.

ITEMCODE FROM SPREF

Itemcodes to be taken from the SPCOM.

ITEMCODE FOR SUPPORTS FROM FSTATUS

Itemcodes for Supports to be taken from the FSTATUSattribute of the Support.

ITEMCODE FOR SUPPORTS FROM :MDSItemCode

Itemcodes for Supports to be taken from the:MDSItemCode UDA of the Support.

ITEMCODE FOR SUPPORTS FROM PROP RNAM

Itemcodes for Supports to be taken from the RNAMProperty of the Support.

Related Commands:

MATERIALLIST DELIMITER

Command Syntax:

12.02:68


2.3.48 JOINTNUMBERS

>-- ITEMcode --+----------------------. | | ‘-- FROM --+--SPREF* --+- LENGth --+-- LONG ----. | | | | | | | | ‘-- SHORT* --| | | | | | | |-- TOTal* ----. | | | | | | | | |-- SEParate --+---------| | | | | | | ‘------------------------| | | | | ‘-- :udaname ------------------------+--> | ‘--FOR SUPPORTS FROM --+-- SPREF* --------------+ | | ‘-- :udaname ------------+ | | ‘-- attribute -----------+ | | ‘-- PROP property -------+-->

Querying: Q ITEMCODEQ ITEMCODE LENGTHQ OPTions

Function: Numbering joints in Spool Drawings on an isometric.

Description: By default SPOOLER automatically generates numbers forevery joint in a Spool Drawing. These numbers can be output onan isometric by switching JOINTNumbers ON.

Note: This function has no effect when plotting isometrics fromthe DESIGN database.

The joints are sequentially numbered from one end of the SpoolDrawing, with each number being given a prefix indicating thetype of joint. The default prefixes are:

• F Flange• S Screwed• C Compression

Note: The ‘F, S & C’ codes are ATexts, and can be changed.

The numbers are displayed in a diamond, with an arrow pointingto the joint. If the total number of characters (prefix + number) isgreater than 3, the number is displayed in angled brackets; e.g.<FL124>.

Examples: JOINTN ON Switches joint numbering on

JOINTN OFF Switches joint numbering off.

12.02:69


2.3.49 KEYS

Related Commands:

PBENDNUMBERS WELDNUMBERS

Syntax Graph: >--- JOINTNumbers ---+--- ON ----.| |‘--- OFF ---+--->

Querying: Q JOINTNumbers

Function: Allows components with specified SKEYS to be treated like instruments.

Description: Component types that can be tagged, that is types that can havetheir names plotted automatically on the isometric drawing, canbe treated like instruments. This means that:

• If INSTRUMENT SPREF is set, the SPREF will be used asthe itemcode.

• If INSTRUMENT NAME is set, the itemcode column will beleft blank and the name will be appended to the description.

• If INSTRUMENT NAME WITH BALLOONS is set, thename will be output in a balloon on the isometric.

The types that can be tagged are:INST VALV FILTER PCOMTRAP VENT TWA VFWA

To treat a component type as an instrument, give each specificcomponent type a key number, and then relate the key numberto the symbol key (SKEY) by the KEYS command.

See the TAG command for more information about tagging.

Examples: KEYS 1 ’VVFL’

Any valve with the symbol key VVFL, and which has aname, will have its name appended to its description andthe itemcode column left blank. If a valve with the symbolkey VVFL is not named, its SPREF will be output as itsitemcode in the normal way.

KEYS 1

Remove the component from the key number list byquoting its number only.

Command Syntax: >--- KEYS --- keynumber --+--- skey’ ---.| |‘--------------+--->

where keynumber is the key number (which must be in therange 1 to 20) and skey is the symbol key (SKEY attribute).

Querying: Q OPTIONS

12.02:70


2.3.50 LEGLENGTH

2.3.51 LINETHICKNESS

Q KEYS List the key numbers currently set.

Q KEYS keynumber

List the SKEY associated with the number.

Function: Allows you to specify the plotted leg length of elbows, tees andcrosses.

Description: By default, the plotted leg length of Elbows, Tees and Crosses is9mm. If necessary you can change this value. The minimum leglength allowed is 6mm. If you specify a smaller value than this,ISODRAFT will give the message

Leglength set to minimum value of 6mm

Examples: LEGLength 12

Command Syntax: >--- LEGLength --- <uval> --->

Querying: Q LEGLENGTHQ OPTIONS

Function: Allows you to control (optionally) the thickness of line used torepresent piping.

Description: This command allows you to specify a line thickness (from 1 to10) to represent piping on the isometric. A default value (3) isused if you do not specify a thickness.

Examples: LINETHICKNESS 8

Specifies a line thickness of 8 to be used to represent piping.

Command Syntax: >--- LINEthickness --- <uval> --->

Querying: Q LINEthicknessQ OPTions

12.02:71


2.3.52 LOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE

2.3.53 MARGIN

Function: Allows you to specify an additional length of tube on cut tube tocompensate for field-fitted welds and loose flanges, where theALLO attribute has not been set.

Description: If a cut pipe list has been specified using the CUTPIPELISTcommand, ISODRAFT automatically includes a site fittingallowance in each calculated cut pipe length which terminatesin:

• A flange with its LOOSE attribute set to TRUE (i.e. a looseflange)

• An element of generic type WELD which has the symbolkey WF (i.e. a field-fit weld)

The allowance is taken from the value of the ALLO attribute forthe weld or flange, if set. If the value of ALLO is not set (or zero),the allowance defaults to 150mm. The default allowance can bealtered using the LOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE command.

The fabricator and/or erector can be informed of the in-builtallowance by means of a message in the title block area.

Note: The dimension shown on the isometric drawing is theactual designed dimension.

Examples: LOOSE 4 INCH

Adds 4 inches to tube length for each field-fitted weld orloose flange with no ALLO value set.

LOOSE 0

No additional tube length added for field-fitted welds orloose flange.

Command Syntax: >--- LOOSeflangeallowance --- <uval> --->

Querying: Q LOOSeflangeallowanceQ OPTions

Function: Specifies the width of the margin on each side of the drawing.

Description: By default, a 5mm wide blank margin is provided on each side ofthe drawing area. The MARGIN command allows you to specifythe widths of the left, right, top and bottom marginsindependently.

12.02:72


2.3.54 MARK

Examples: MARGIN TOP 0.5 IN

Sets top margin to 0.5 inch.

MARGIN L15 R15 T25 B25

Sets all four margins in a single command line (assumescurrent units are mm).

Command Syntax: .---------<--------./ |

>--- MARGin ---*--- Left value -----|| ||--- Right value ----|| ||--- Top value ------|| |‘--- Bottom value ---+--->

Related Commands:

RESERVE

Querying: Q MARGinQ OPTions

Function: Defines if the Pipe revision attribute (REV) should beincremented and if the Branch detail attribute (DETA) should beset to TRUE after successful detailing by ISODRAFT.

Description: By default, the REV and DETA attributes will not be changedwhen a pipe or branch has been detailed.

• If MARK DETAIL ON is set, the DETA attribute for eachBranch detailed will be set to TRUE.

• If MARK REVISION ON is specified, the REV attribute ofeach Pipe detailed will incremented.

By default, ISODRAFT will not detail a pipe if any of its brancheshas its DETA attribute set to TRUE. To override this, use thecommand MARK IGNORE ON.

The MARK command generates an inter-DB macro, to be run inDESIGN to set the REV and DETA attributes as described. Thismacro will be created (in the project's XXXMAC directory) onlywhen you carry out a module change or execute a SAVEWORKcommand.

12.02:73


2.3.55 MATCONTROL

Examples: MARK DETail ON

Sets the DETA attribute of each Branch to TRUE.

MARK REVision ON

Increments the REV attribute of the Pipe.

The defaults for the detail and revision flag options are:

MARK DETAIL OFFMARK REVISION OFF MARK IGNORE OFF

Command Syntax: >--- MARK ---+--- DETail -----.| ||--- REVision ---|| |‘--- IGNOre -----+--- ON ----.

| |‘--- OFF* --+--->

Querying: Q MARKQ OPTions

Function: Creates a material control file.

Description: The material control file is an ASCII interface file which can beused to pass details of material requirements to an externalmaterial control program. This file contains fixed-format recordsof all materials incorporated into the isometric drawing, includingpiping components, tube, bolts, etc.

A material control file is produced for each ISODRAFT DETAILcommand. The file generated during a multiple plot run containsmaterial records for all pipelines detailed by that command. Therecords thus derived are added to any records already in the file.

This filing command always operates in append mode: that is,new data is always added to the end of any existing file of thesame name rather than overwriting the current contents. If thespecified file does not already exist, a new file of that name iscreated.

To avoid accumulating large files (due to the use of appendmode), always delete redundant files once the required data hasbeen transferred to the external material control system.

The data in the file is coded so as to produce a tabulated recordof the quantity if each type of component for each pipeline orsplit drawing. Each record sequence begins with a generalheader, which includes references and specification applicableto the pipeline as a whole, followed by a detailed breakdown ofthe individual items.

12.02:74


2.3.56 MATERIALLIST

You can add extra information to the basic material control fileusing the EXTENDED command. This adds the following to thefile:

• Part numbers (in word 8 of component records)• Item descriptions (as record -21)• File header with: -5 record (originating program/version) -3

record (title block information)

Material Control File defines the codes used to identify therecords.

Command Syntax: >--- MATControl ---+--- name ---+---EXTended--.| | || ‘-------------||--- OFF ------------------|| |‘--------------------------+--->

Querying: Q MATControlQ OPTIONS

Function: Allows you to control whether the material list is shown on the isometric, and alter the display format if required.

Description: The MATERIALLIST command allows you to control:• Whether or not the list is shown on the drawing at all. The

default is for the list to be plotted.• The position of the list on the drawing sheet. The default is

left-hand side.• Whether the characters used for plotting the list are small,

medium or large. The default is medium.• The spacing between the lines in the list, relative to the

default of 100.• The order that columns of details are shown on the list, and

whether columns are displayed at all.• The width of the itemcode column in characters. Default is

8 characters and the maximum length is 29 characters.Both lengths exclude the leading / in the PDMS name.

• Whether or not component descriptions are included in thelist. By default all descriptions are included.

• Whether part numbers created in the SPOOLER moduleare used, or whether part numbers are generatedautomatically in ISODRAFT and held in the DESIGNdatabase (using the PARTNUMBERS FROMDBcommand), or part numbers generated by ISODRAFT(using the PARTNUMBERS GENERATED command).

12.02:75


• If you are using totalled database part numbers, multiplepart numbers will be output, separated by spaces, in asingle entry in the material list, wrapping round if thecolumn width is exceeded. You should ensure that the partnumbers column is wide enough to display several partnumbers (say, eight characters) or the material list will bejust as long. The quantity column will show the total of likeitems. Part number tags will still be individual.

• How the overflow of long lists is to be handled, and if extrasheets are needed, how they are to be numbered.

Formatting the Material List

If you leave ISODRAFT to its default settings (as describedbelow), the material list will always be produced on the left handside of the drawing sheet, using medium size characters to astandard linespacing. The itemcode column will be eightcharacters wide, and material descriptions will be included in thelist. A separate material list will be plotted for every drawingsheet listing only the items on that sheet, with any continuationsbeing plotted on a blank, dummy sheet.

These default settings will probably be appropriate for manyuses of ISODRAFT. However, if need be you can change thesesettings to your own requirements. Examples of how to do thisare included below.

Long Material Lists, and Sheet Numbering

If a material list is too long to fit onto one sheet it will normally becontinued on a dummy sheet. This sheet will be identified DRGn OF m and will contain only the overflow of the material list.This is the default.

Alternatively, you can specify that the material list will becontinued in a second area beside the first one. This will result ina non-standard size for the drawing sheet, which will exceed thenormal width by the amount needed for the second material list.

Inclusion of Database Part Numbers

The SPOOLER module allows you to set part numbers on:piping components; sections of tubes; bolts and additionalitems. If this feature is used it applies to an individual pipe,individual branch or to a drawing as defined in the SPOOLERmodule.

The PARTNUMBERS FROMDB command allows you to includepart numbers from the DESIGN database in the material list. IfISODRAFT finds any unnumbered parts it will display an errormessage and halt the drawing of the isometric. You can specifySEParate part numbers, which will generate an entry for eachitem; TOTalled part numbers, which will create a single entry foreach item with a quantity or PIPEonlyseparate, which will list allpipes separately but will generate a totalled list of othercomponents.

12.02:76


If this part numbering feature of DESIGN has not been used,ISODRAFT will produce part numbers according to its ownsystem defaults.

If you are using the PARTNUMBERS FROMDB option you candefine your own material list format. You can specify which itemsappear on the list, and in what order they appear. TheTABLEDEFINITION command allows you to control the content,nature and order of standard column details in the material list.You can also define additional columns (using the commandsTABLEDEFINITION COLUMNNUMBER text attribute). In thisfashion you can define the additional column title, whichSPCOM or component attribute or UDA will be used as data tofill the column, the column width and the order it will be shownon the list. A remarks column may be included for the cutting listremarks, since each piece of tube is listed separately.

The PARTNUMBERS PERSPOOL command displays partnumbers separately for each spool.

Note: If the attribute of a chosen SPCOM is a reference UDA,referring to a text element, then the value of STEXT forthat text appears in the column.

Examples: Material list formatting

MATE OFF

Material list not shown on drawing.

MATE RIGHT CHARH 2.0

Material list plotted on right-hand side of drawing sheet,using 2.0mm high characters.

MATE LEFT CHARH 2.5

Material list plotted on left-hand side of drawing sheet,using 2.5mm high characters.

MATE LSPA 105

Increases the line spacing by 5%

MATE CODE 12

Itemcode column 12 characters wide.

MATE NODESC

Material descriptions omitted from list.

MATE DESC

Material descriptions included in list.

MATE TABLED COL 1 QUANT

Defines column 1 in the material list as ‘Quantity’.

MATE TABLED COL 2 EMP

Sets column 2 as an empty column.

12.02:77


MATEriallist DRWG

Plots a separate material list on every drawing sheet,listing only items drawn on that sheet.

MATEriallist LINE

Plots, on the first drawing sheet, a single material list forthe whole pipe line or system.

Long material lists

MATE DUMMY

Long list continued on separate drawing sheet, with noisometric plot on it. Single sheets not numbered. Multiplesheets numbered ‘1 of n’, ‘2 of n’ etc. This is the default.

MATE DUMM SING

Long list continued on separate drawing sheet, which hasno isometric plot on it. Single sheets numbered ‘1 of 1’.Multiple sheets numbered ‘1 of n’, ‘2 of n’ etc.

MATE DUMM SUFF

Long list continued on separate drawing sheet, which hasno isometric plot on it. Single sheets not numbered.Multiple sheets numbered ‘1 of n’, ‘1A of n’ (for the sheetwith the material list only), ‘2 of n’ etc

MATE OVER

Long list continued to the right of the preceding list on thesame drawing sheet. Single sheets are not numbered.

Note: This may produce non-standard drawing sizes.

MATE OVER SINGle

Long list continued to the right of the preceding list on thesame drawing sheet. Sheets numbered ‘1 of n’, ‘2 of n’ etc.Single sheets numbered ‘1 of 1’.

The default is:

MATE ON LEFT CHARH 2.45 LSPAC 100 CODE 8 DESC DUMMY DRWG

Related Commands:

ITEMCODE MTEXTS DTEXTS RESERVE

Command Syntax:

12.02:78


.---------------------------------<-----------------------------------. / |>-MATEriallist-*- ON* -. |

| | ||- OFF -+---------------------------------------------------------------|| ||- LEFT* -. || | ||- RIGHT -+-------------------------------------------------------------|| ||- CHARHeight - value --------------------------------------------------|| ||- LSPAcing - integer --------------------------------------------------|| ||- CODE - integer ------------------------------------------------------|| ||- DESCriptions* -------------------------------------------------------|| ||- NODEscriptions ------------------------------------------------------|| ||- TABLEdefinition -+---------------------------------------------------|| | || ‘- COLumn val -+- PARTnumber --------------------. || | | || |- DEScription -------------------| || | | || |- BORe --------------------------| || | | || |- ITEMcode ----------------------| || | | || |- QUANtity -+- IN -+- <munits> --| || | | | || | ‘--------------------| || | | || |- REMarks -+- AND -+- <remarks> -| || | | | || | ‘---------------------| || | | || ‘- <other> -----------------------+--||- PARTNumbers -+- PERSPool -. || | | || ‘------------+-- FROMDB ---+-- SEParate ----------. || | | | || | |-- TOTalled ----------| || | | | || | ‘-- PIPEonlyseparate --+-----|| | || ‘ - GENerated -----------------------------||- DUMMy* --. || | ||- OVER ----+-----------------------------------------------------------|| | || |--- SUFFix ---+--------------------------------------------|| | | || ‘--------------+--- SINGle ---------------------------------||- DRWG* --. || | |‘- LINE ---+------------------------------------------------------------+-->

where <munits> is

METres or MILlimetres.

This lets you set the metric units to be used for pipe lengths in the Quantity column.

Note: That this affects metric isos only.

<remarks> is

12.02:79


.------------------------------------------------------------------------. / |

--*- attribute -+- FROMSPcom -. .-----------. || | / | |‘-------------+- ON -+- component -* | |

| | | ||- TUBE ------| | || | | ||- BOLT ------+- component -| || | | || |- TUBE ------| || | | || |- BOLT ------’ || | |‘- ALL -------+- nl -------------------|

| |‘-------------------------’

This allows attributes or UDAs to be taken from the catalogue or from the component,where component is one of the following:

BEND ELBOw CAP CLOSure COUPling

CROSs FBLInd FLANge FTUBe INSTrument

LJSEnd OLET TEE PCOMPonent REDUcer

SHU TRAP TUBE UNIOn VALVe

VFWAy VTWAy WELD GASKet SUPPort

ALL

<other> is -+- HEADing -.| ||-----------+- text -.| |‘- NOHeading --------+- attribute -+- FROMSPcom -|

| | || ‘-------------||‘- WEIGHT -+- TOTAL FABRICATION -.

| |‘---------------------+--.

|.-----------------------------<--------------------------------’|‘--+- TOTAL ERECTION -.

| |‘------------------+- TOTAL COMBINED -.

| |‘------------------+- Factor --value --|

| |‘-------------------+--.

|.-----------------------------<---------------------------------’|‘--+- TubeFactor -- value --|

| |‘------------------------|

12.02:80


2.3.57 MATLISTFILENAME

Column width can be specified as part of the TABLEDEFINITION COLUMN syntax byadding:

- WITH WIdth value -+- nl -|| |‘------’

Querying: Q MATEriallistQ OPTions

Function: Specifies the name of a file to which the material list is to besent. Also specifies whether one file should be created for eachplot, or one file for all plots.

Description: You can send a copy of the material list data to a text file. Thisfile can be printed, and edited to produce, for example, anordering schedule. The MATLISTFILENAME commandspecifies the filename and the page length (as the number oflines) for its formatted contents. The file contains Fortrancarriage control characters and page headers and footers.

Subsequent MATLISTFILENAME commands followed by thesame filename will overwrite the file, unless you use theOVERWRITE option.

By default, the material list is not sent to a file, so you do nothave to specify a filename in order to use ISODRAFT. Thedefault page length is 55 lines.

Material list numbers are shown on the isometric plot even whenthe material list is sent only to a file.

Examples: MATLIST /SITE_A-LIST

Material list data sent to named file with default pagelength of 55 lines.

MATLIST /SITE_A-LIST WITH 70 LINES

Material list data sent to named file with page length of 70lines.

MATLIST /SITE_A-LIST PERPLOT OVER WITH 70 LINES

Material list data sent to a number of files, one for eachplot, with page length of 70 lines. The filenames are takenfrom the specified name, followed by an automaticnumeric suffix (in a similar fashion to plotfile naming). ThePERPLOTFILE OVERWRITE command overwrites anyfiles that exists with the same name as the generated files.

12.02:81


2.3.58 MESSAGEACCURACY

Command Syntax:

>-MATListfilename-+-filename +-OVERwrite --.| | || |-APPend -----|| | || |-PERPlotfile +- OVERwrite -.| | | || '-------------+-------------|-With integer Lines-.| | | || ‘-------------+--------------------|| |‘---OFF*----------------------------------------------------+->

Querying: Q MATListfilenameQ OPTions

Function: Controls how arrowed messages on the isometric are positioned on the isometric.

Description: The MESSAGEACCURACY RADIAL option determines theaccuracy level of the radial search, based on the number ofradial directions searched away from the arrowhead, thenumber of additional directions for kinked lines, and the lengthof increments of leader lines. The levels are as follows:

Level Radial directions searched away from arrowhead

Additional directions for kinked lines

Length increments of leader line

1 18 directions @ 20 degrees 2 directions @ 80 degrees 4mm

2 36 directions @ 10 degrees 4 directions @ 40, 80degrees

2mm

3 72 directions @ 5 degrees 8 directions @ 20, 40, 80degrees

1mm

Once all messages have been positioned, theMESSAGEACCURACY ITERATIONS option repositions anymessages with crossing leader lines, and all messages withleader lines passing through the text block. You can set amaximum number of iterations, and the process is repeated untilone of the following conditions is satisfied:

• No leader lines cross and no messages need to be moved.• The number of leader lines crossing and messages moving

is the same as the previous iteration.• The maximum number of iterations set by the option is

reached.

12.02:82


2.3.59 MESSAGEFILENAME

You should start with accuracy level 1. Higher accuracy levelsare achieved at the expense of performance. Increasing thenumber of iterations is not as expensive as higher accuracylevels, as often an equilibrium is reached before the maximumnumber of iterations. Thus it is recommended that the effect ofincreasing iterations be examined before increasing theaccuracy level.

Examples: MESSAGEACC RADIAL 2

Sets the accuracy level to 2, as shown in the above table.

MESSAGEACC ITERATIONS 4

Sets the maximum number of iterations to 4.

MESSAGEACC DEFAULT

Sets the default conditions of level 1 accuracy and 1iteration.

Command Syntax: >--- MESSAGEACCuracy ---+--- RADial --- level -----.| ||--- ITerations value -----|| |‘--- DEFault --------------+--->

Querying: Q MESSAGEACCuracy

Function: Specifies the name of the file to which messages about howdetailing is progressing will be sent.

Description: Before ISODRAFT will carry out a checking or detailingoperation, you must specify the name of a file to which errorand/or progress messages can be sent. There is no default filename.

Examples: MESS /ISOMESS

Creates a new message file.

MESS /ISOMESS OVER

Overwrites an existing file.

Command Syntax: >--- MESSagefilename filename ---+--- OVER ---.| |‘------------+--->

Querying: Q MESSagefilenameQ OPTions

12.02:83


2.3.60 MTEXTS

Function: Controls the material description part of item descriptions.

Description: A complete item description in a material list consists of thegeometric description (derived from the attributes of a DTEXTelement) and the material description (derived from theattributes of an MTEXT element).

MTEXT has three attributes: XTEXT, YTEXT and ZTEXT. Bydefault, the text which appears in the material list is the XTEXTattribute, but this can be changed so that the text stored in theYTEXT or ZTEXT attribute is displayed. This can be used, forexample, to store descriptions in different languages.

The MTEXTS IGNORE command allows you to suppress thematerial description to give a more concise material list entry.

Examples: MTEXts Ytext

Sets the description to the text held in the YTEXT attribute

MTEXts Ztext

Sets the description to the text held in the ZTEXT attribute

MTEXts Xtext

Sets the description to the text held in the XTEXT attribute.This is the default.

MTEXts IGNORE

Suppresses the material description completely.

MTEXts ON

Resets the material description to the text previously set.(XTEXT by default.)

Related Commands:

MATERIALLIST DTEXTS

Command Syntax: >--- MTEXts ---+--- IGNORE ---.| ||--- ON -------|| ||--- Xtext* ---|| ||--- Ytext ----|| |‘--- Ztext ----+--->

Querying: Q MTEXTQ OPTIONS

12.02:84


2.3.61 OPTIONS

2.3.62 OUTCOM

Function: Allows you to reset all options to their default settings.

Description: The OPTIONS command gives you a quick way of querying thecurrent settings of multiple options or of resetting all options totheir default states.

Note: After giving this command, you must specify thedestination (terminal or file) and the message file again.

Command Syntax: >--- OPTions DEFault --->

Querying: Q OPTions Gives current settings of all options.

Function: Defines the style in which attributes are output on the isometricdrawing area. You can also output the P3 directions of FTUBelements.

Description: You can output piping component attributes and user-definedattributes on the isometric drawing area. You can choosewhether the text is boxed or unboxed, and the style of box used.You can also output empty boxes for manual mark-up. Six stylesare available:

• A rectangular box with straight ends• A rectangular box with angled ends• A rectangular box with round ends• A triangular box• A diamond-shaped box• Unboxed

Examples: OUTC NAME SHOP :UDA1 ON INST ELBO PCOM WITH STR

Positions the attribute values for NAME, SHOP and theUDA values for UDA1 as straight edged boxed commentson all Instruments and Pcoms. The box leader line pointsto the centre of the component.

OUTC SHOP OFF

Switches off the output of the SHOP attributes for allcomponents.

OUTC BLANK 6 ON BEND WITH ANGL

Outputs an empty angled-edge box on all bends withspace for 6 text characters.

12.02:85


OUTC NAME ON ELBO OFF

Switches off output of the NAME attribute on ELBOWS.

OUTC P3DIRF WITH STRAIGHTOutputs P3 directions for FTUB as a straight edged box.

Restrictions: • Triangular boxes will have a limit of two characters.• Diamond boxes will have a limit of three characters.• Unset attributes will not be output.• Warnings are not output for unset or nonexistent attributes.• Empty boxes which are drawn as unboxed will not be

shown.

Command Syntax:

.-----<-----./ |

>- OUTCom -*- attribute -+| ||- P3DIRFtub -+----------------.| | ||-------------+- ON component -+- WITH --.| | | || | |---------+- BOXStyle style ---.| | | || ‘----------------+- OFF ------------------------|

| |‘- OFF -----------------------------------------------------+->

where attribute is one of the following:

NAME OWNER POSItion ORIentation SPREf

LSTUbe BUILt SHOP ISPEc TSPEc

ANGLe HEIGht RADIus LOOSe LOFFl

ALLOwance CREF CRFA CSTReLAXEs

ATTYp SPLN SPLT LEND TYPE

BLANK n :udaname :udaname NUMBERinteger

where :udaname NUMBER integer outputs a single element of a UDA array.

component is one of the following:

BEND ELBOw CAP CLOSure COUPling

CROSs FBLInd FLANge FTUBEINSTrument

LJSEnd OLET TEE PCOMPonent REDUcer

SHU TRAP UNIOn VALVe VFWAy

VTWAy WELD GASKet SUPPort ALL

12.02:86


style is one of the following:

STRaight ANGLed ROUNd TRIangular DIAMond

Querying: Q OUTCom

Lists all attributes output.

Q OUTCom attribute

Lists information about the named attribute.

Q OUTCom BLANK

Lists all blank lengths output, e.g. 6, 8, 12.

Q OUTCom BLANK n

Lists information about the blank of given length.

Q OUTCom UDA

Lists the names of all UDAs output.

Q OUTCom :udaname

Lists information for the named UDA.

Q OUTCom :udaname NUMBer integer

Lists information about the given element of a UDA array.

Q OUTCom PTDIRF

Lists information about tagging P3 directions on FTUBs.

Q OPTIONS

Lists all options set.

Note: The following queries are for application work only, andshould not be used in normal program use. Triplets are acombination of attribute, component and boxstyle:

Q OUTCom TRIPlets

Lists the number of triplets.

Q OUTCom TRIPlets n

Lists the details (component/attribute/ boxstyle) of tripletnumber n.

Q OUTCom BLANKTRIPlets

Lists the number of blank triplets.

Q OUTCom BLANKTRIPlets n

Lists the details (component/number of characters/boxstyle) of blank triplet number n

12.02:87


2.3.63 OVERALLSKEWS

2.3.64 PBENDNUMBERS

Function: Allows you to specify whether triangular skewboxes are shownas overall skewboxes across branches, or as separateskewboxes between branch connections.

Examples: OVERALLSKEWS ON

Triangle skewboxes shown as overall skewboxes acrossbranches

OVERALLSKEWS OFF

Triangle skewboxes shown as separate skewboxesbetween branch connections.

Related Commands:

SKEWBOX

Command Syntax: >--- OVERALLSKews ---+--- ON* ---.| |‘--- OFF ---+-->

Querying: Q OVERALLSKQ OPTIONS

Function: Numbering the pulled bends in Spool Drawings on an isometric.

Description: By default SPOOLER automatically generates numbers forevery pulled bend in a Spool Drawing. These numbers can beoutput on an isometric, by switching PBENDNumbers ON.

Note: This function has no effect when plotting isometrics fromthe DESIGN database.

The bends are sequentially numbered from one end of the SpoolDrawing with a default prefix of ‘B’. The numbers are displayedin a diamond, with an arrow pointing to the pulled bend. If thetotal number of characters (prefix + number) is greater than 3,the number is displayed in angled brackets; e.g. <B232>.

Examples: PBENDN ON Switches pulled bend numbering on.

PBENDN OFF Switches pulled bend numbering off.

Related Commands:

JOINTNUMBERS WELDNUMBERS

12.02:88


2.3.65 PICTURESCALE

Syntax Graph: >--- PBENDNumbers ---+--- ON ----.| |‘--- OFF ---+--->

Querying: Q PBENDNumbersQ OPTIONS

Function: Allows you to set the scale of the isometric drawing.

Description: For a given sheet size, the scale of the isometric drawing is setby default to give a good compromise between the amount ofinformation displayed and its legibility. The PICTURESCALEcommand allows you to reset the scale. The value you give isthe scale factor relative to the default value of 100.

Note: Changing the picture scale does not scale the wholeisometric, but just affects the size of the symbols andannotation relative to the length of pipe shown. Thematerial list is not affected.

It is probable that increasing the picture scale much above 100will split the drawing onto more sheets. See the SPLITcommand for details of how this can be controlled.

Examples: PICT 200 Magnifies the symbols to twice the size.

PICT 50 Reduces the size of the symbols by half.

Related Commands:

SPLIT

Command Syntax: >--- PICTurescale --- value --->

Querying: Q PICTureSCaleQ OPTions

12.02:89


2.3.66 PLOTDETAILDATA

Function: Allows you to position parameterised attribute data within detail plots.

Description: Detail plots may also contain the parameterised values of anyallowable type of system or user defined attributes. The attributes aredefined using the PLOTDETaildata command. This definitionincludes the following fields:

• Which attributes to display.• X, Y coordinates of the parameterised text, relative to the origin

of the detail plot.• Character height.• Angle at which to display text.

The values of the different types of attributes are output as text records, using the following formats:

• Array attributes are shown separated by a line.• Reference attributes are output as the full text of the attribute.• Logical attributes are shown as T or F.• Position, orientation and direction attributes are separated by

spaces.

Examples: PLOTDET /DETAIL1 ATTR PPOS 1 x 10 y 10 h 10 a 45

Plots the value of attribute ‘PPOS 1’ in DETAIL1, at a positionof 10:10 from the origin, with a character height of 10 and at anangle of 45°.

PLOTDET /DETAIL6 ATTR DPFN x 10 y 5 h 3.5 a 0

Plots the value of attribute ‘DPFN’ in DETAIL6, at a position of10:5 from the origin, with a character height of 3.5 and at anangle of 0°.

Command Syntax:

>- PLOTDETaildata -- ATTRibute - ATQNUM --+- X -----.| ||- Y -----|| ||- Height-|| |‘- Angle -+- value ->

Querying: Q PLOTDETaildata All

Will output all information for all detailed PLOT files.

Q PLOTDETaildata /filename All

Will list details of all parameters for the given PLOT file.

Q PLOTDETaildata /filename NUM/ATTRIBUTES

Will display the number of attributes for the given PLOT file.

Q PLOTDETaildata /filename ATTR INT

Will return the X,Y coordinates, height and angle of the INT’thparameter in the specified PLOT file.

12.02:90


2.3.67 PLOTTINGSCALE

2.3.68 POSITION

Function: Defines the scale of the plot independently of the drawing sheetsize.

Description: By default, the actual size of the plotted drawing sheetgenerated by ISODRAFT is the same as the designed sheetsize specified by the SIZE command. You can specify a plottedsheet smaller than the designed sheet by using thePLOTTINGSCALE command followed by a percentage scalingfactor in the range 50-100%.

Examples: PLOT 70.71

Applied to an A2 drawing, will create an A3 plot (70.71 = 1/Ö2 expressed as a percentage). This can be useful if, forexample, you want the drawing layout provided for an A2plot, but you want output from an A3 plotter.

PLOT 50

Applied to an A1 drawing, will create an A3 plot.

Command Syntax: >--- PLOTtingscale value --->

where value represents a percentage scaling factor in the range50-100%. The default is 100.

Querying: Q PLOTTQ OPTIONS

Function: Allows you to create tables of standard text annotations or pipeattributes.

Description: All items of text used for the standard annotation of isometricshave default positions at which they are plotted on the drawings.Some of these texts, together with a list of specified pipeattributes, can be plotted in a separate area away from the maindrawing.

The standard text annotations which can be repositioned are asfollows:

12.02:91


• The North direction arrow;• Spool numbers;• Sheet numbers; i.e. X in DRG X OF Y;• Sheet totals; i.e. Y in DRG X OF Y;• The Project Number; • System isometric names; • The Bend radius; • The date.

You can also specify the positions of up to 100 additional pipeattributes such as the pipe’s name, owner, temperature andpressure rating, and include UDAs and user-specified text. Youcan also specify the position of drawing attributes when detailinga drawing as defined by the SPOOLER module, using theSystem attribute option.

All text must be positioned in a margin, away from the drawingarea, to avoid overwriting the isometric plot itself. You willnormally allocate a suitable margin by using the MARGIN orRESERVE commands.

Note: No checks on text positions are made by ISODRAFT, soyou must take care not to corrupt the isometric by poorpositioning.

Note: Positioning an annotation at the origin (0, 0) has theeffect of suppressing the output of that text. This isparticularly useful for suppressing the output of names orthe North arrow.

It is possible to output the same piece of text at more than oneposition on an isometric plot by defining its coordinates morethan once. The new definitions will not overwrite the earlierones. The command POSITION text OFF is used to cancel adefined text position. You can define an angle of rotation for thepositioned text, ranging from horizontal to vertical, using theANGLE command.

The POSITION command also allows you to produce a numberof different tables on the isometric:

BENDING TABLES can be produced using the BENDTABLEcommand. This creates a sketch showing a schematic of abend, annotated to show the various bend parameters, and atable giving the appropriate lengths, radii and angles for pulledbends appearing on that drawing. If needed, you can output thedata as an ASCII file for transfer to a bending machine.

12.02:92


Drawing History Tables can be included using theREVISIONTABLE command. This produces a detailed history ofthe drawing (for example dates, descriptions, who drew andapproved the drawing and so on). Details for up to ten revisionsof the isometric will be included (numbered 0 to 9). Only UDAscan be selected for the table, and each UDA represents a family(for example, :REV0 means subsequent table entries will betaken from :REV0, :REV1, :REV2 and so on until an unsetattribute is found.

Design Conditions Tables are available through theSYSTEMTABLE command. These apply to system isometrics ordrawings as defined by the SPOOLER module. For each columna pipe attribute or UDA can be selected (see the tabledef syntaxdescription). If a SHORTCODE is defined it will be used to labelthe divisions between pipes on a drawing (a shortcode of L willlabel pipes as L1, L2 etc.). This shortcode can be included in thetable against the pipe name. Also, you can specify delimitercharacters for pipe name prefix and suffix. If you select either orboth delimiters for a name, the prefix or suffix will be stripped offbefore outputting the pipe name to the table. Therefore, twopipes forming one line on the P&ID, bearing the same basicname but with different area code suffixes, will appear as asingle name in the table.

Weld Tables can be included by using the WELDTABLEcommand, and this also allows you to create a Weld Report File.Note that WELDNUMBERS FROMDB must be selected if youwish to produce either a user-defined Weld Table or a WeldReport File (see the WELDNUMBERS command). Each columnmust be set to be filled by an attribute or UDA of the welds. Youcan choose one column as an alphanumeric sort key (the defaultbeing the weld number). If you choose a column other than weldnumber as a sort key, the table will be sorted firstly by yourselected column and secondly by weld number. The sort ordercan be forwards (meaning numbers start at the top of the table)or reverse (numbers start at the bottom of the table). Columntitle can be left blank if needed, and you can leave columncontents empty if desired.

Dynamic Detail Area PLOT Files can be included using theDETAILPLOTS command. These can show details of anyparticular item of interest on the isometric (welded supports,drain and vent assemblies, complex manifolds etc.).

12.02:93


Command Syntax:

>-POSItion ----.|

>-TEXTPOSition-+-SYSTEMName-------.| ||-SPOOlnumber------|| ||-PROJnumber-------|| ||-DATE-------------|| ||-NORTHArrow-------|| ||-SHEETNumber------|| ||-SHEETTotal-------|| ||-BENDRADius-------|| ||-SYSTem attribute-|| ||-attribute--------|| ||-text ------------+-AT-+-X <uval> Y <uval>-.| | | || | ‘-Y <uval> X <uval>-+-CHARH val -+-ANGle val-.| | | || | |-----------+-BOXed--.| | | || | +-<xyoff>-<tab>------+-.| | ‘----------------------|| |- <reltxt> -------------------------------------------------|| | || ‘- OFF ------------------------------------------------------||-BENDtable-------------------+- <possiz> --. || | | || |- FILEonly ---| || | | ||-REVISIONTable---. ‘- OFF --------+----------------------------------|| | ||-SYSTEMTable-----+- <possiz> -. || | | || |- OFF ------+-----------------. || | | |

‘- ADD -- <tabledef> ----------+------------------------------|| ||-WELDtable----+--<sortby>--. || | | || |------------+--<possiz>--. || | | | || | ‘--FILEonly--| || | | || ‘----ADD---<tabledef>-----+--------------------------------------|| | ||-DETAILPlots -+-CORner-<possiz>-<direc>-+-STACK-<int>-<direc>-. || | | | || | ‘---------------------+- SCALE-<int> --|| | || |-MAnual- CHARH val --SCALE-<int> -------------------------------|| | || |-ON ------------------------------------------------------------|| | || ‘—OFF -----------------------------------------------------------||-TEXTs------------. || | ||-ATTRibutes-------| || | ||-SYSTEMATTRibutes-+---OFF------------------------------------------------------|‘-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+->

12.02:94


xyoff defines the x and y offsets between the columns androws for positioning attributes on system isometrics, asfollows:>--+-- XOFFset - <uval> --+-- YOFFset - <uval> --.

| ‘----------------------|| |‘-- YOFFset - <uval> --+-- XOFFset - <uval> --|

‘----------------------+-->

uval is a dimension in either the current or specified units. Forexample:

X 10 Y 30 current units

X 0.5 inches Y1.2 inches

specified units

reltxt positions the specified corner of the new text relative tothe specified corner of the previous text by the X and Y offsetdistances. The syntax for this is:

- BL -| Where: BL = bottom left| BR = bottom right

- BR -| TL = top left| TR = top right

- TL -||

- TR -+- RELto -+- BL -.| ||- BR -|| ||- TL -|| |‘- TR -+- XOFF -value-|- YOFF -value-|- CHARH -value-+- BOX -.

| | || +-------|‘-----------------------------------------------------+->

For example, the command:

BR REL TL XOFF 10 YOFF 20 CHARH 2.5 BOX

will position the bottom-right corner of the new text 10mmacross and 20mm up from the top-left corner of the previoustext. The new text will be boxed and have a character height of2.5mm.

tab defines the number of rows and columns in the table andthe order in which they are filled:

>- DIREction -+- Horizontal -.| |‘- Vertical ---+- Rows value - Columns value ->

tabledef defines the headings and contents for the productionof user defined tables. Note that ISODRAFT automaticallytabulates the contents of the tables and draws lines betweenthe rows and columns. The syntax is:

12.02:95


.----------------------------------------------------------------------------.>-+- COLumn number -+- HEADing--. |

| | | ||-----------------+-----------+--text--. || | | | || ‘- NOHeading---------+--FILL--. || | | || |--------+--attribute--. || | | | || | ‘--SHORTcode--| || | | || ‘--EMPty-----------------WIdth value--|

where number is the number of the column you wish todefine, text is the column heading (in inverted commas),attribute is any attribute name and value is the column widthin characters. Note that SHORTCODE applies to the SystemTable only.

possiz allows you to position your table:

>- CORner -+- BL -.|- BR -||- TL -|‘- TR -+- AT -.

| |‘------+- X <uval> Y <uval> -.

| |‘- Y <uval> X <uval> -+- CHARacterHeight value ->

with BL being Bottom Left, TR being Top Right, and so on.This allows you to position one of the corners of the tableexactly.

direcn gives a direction for future detail plots:

>-- DIRection --+- Up ----.| ||- Down --|| ||- Left --|| |‘-Right --+-->

CHARHeight value is the character height in mm. The defaultsize is 2.1mm, while the minimum size is 1.4mm.

sortby is:

>-- SORTby -- attribute --+-- FORwards --.| |‘-- REVerse ---+-->

Note: For detailing at Branch level, attributes NAME, PSPEC,ISPEC, TSPEC and PTSP are taken from the Branchsettings. Other attributes are taken from the Pipesettings. If you position any pipe attribute which has anassociated ATEXT, the output of the Atext will besuppressed.

12.02:96


Example: Defining a Spool Number Table

A 4x3 table of spool numbers can be set up by using thecommand

POSI SPOOLN AT X 100 Y 10 CHARH 3 XOFF -10 YOFF 8 DIRE V R 4 C 3

These table parameters (i.e. X Offset -10mm; Y Offset 8mm;Character height 3mm; Direction Vertical; Number of rows 4;Number of columns 3) will generate the following output for apipe containing 11 spools:

The origin of the table (which was positioned at X 100mm, Y10mm by the POSI SPOOLN command) is at the bottom left-hand corner of the first spool number.

If you specify SPOOLNUMBERS OFF before plotting theisometric, the space allocated for the table will appear as ablank area. If you specify SPOOLNUMBERS PREFIX, theprefix will be plotted with the spool number.

If the number of spools exceeds the number of placesavailable in the table (12 in this example), the table will befilled and then an error message will be generated.

Example: Creating a Drawing History Table

If you wished to plot a table that showed the history of anisometric and who was involved in its production, you couldenter the following commands:

POSI REVISIONT COR BL AT X 20 Y 40 CHARH 2.0 COL 1 HEAD ‘Rev‘ :REV0 WI 3COL 2 HEAD ’Description’ :DES0 WI 8COL 3 HEAD ’Date’ :DAT0 WI 8C0L 4 HEAD ’Drwn By’ :DRW0 WI 7COL 5 HEAD ’Chkd By’ :CHK0 WI 11COL 6 HEAD ’Appd By’ :APA0 WI 11COL 7 HEAD ’Appd By’ :APB0 WI 9EXIT

Example: A System Isometric

The following commands will position the pipe attributesNAME, BORE, TEMP, PRESS and CCEN as shown inExamples of Isometric Plots.

[8] [4]

[11] [7] [3]

[10] [6] [2]

[9] [5] [1]

-10mm

8mm

y

x

Direction of table

12.02:97


MATE OFF (Material List not plotted)

MARG R 120 (Set width of right margin)

DIME COMPON

(Plot composite-style dimensions)

SPLIT 1 DRW (Plot whole system on a single sheet)

POSI NAME AT X480 Y150 CHARH 4.5 YOFF -9 DIRE VROWS 6 COLU 1POSI BORE AT X510 Y150 CHARH 4.5 YOFF -9 DIRE VROWS 6 COLU 1POSI TEMP AT X525 Y150 CHARH 4.5 YOFF -9 DIRE VROWS 6 COLU 1POSI PRESS AT X540 Y150 CHARH 4.5 YOFF -9 DIRE VROWS 6 COLU 1POSI CCEN AT X555 Y150 CHARH 4.5 YOFF -9 DIRE VROWS 6 COLU 1DETAIL /SYSTEM1 /SYSTEM2 /SYSTEM3 /SYSTEM4 AS ’/ISOG96.TEST’

Querying: Q OPTions

QTEXTPOSitions

Lists all current user-defined text positions.

QTEXTPOSitionstext

Lists the position of the attribute given by

text.

The following Query commands list the parameters set for theitem, as described in the previous pages:

Q TEXTPOSitions SYSTEMNameQ TEXTPOSitions SPOOlnumbersQ TEXTPOSitions PROJnumberQ TEXTPOSitions DATEQ TEXTPOSitions NORTHArrowQ TEXTPOSitions SHEETNumber

Q TEXTPOSitions BENDRADiusQ TEXTPOSitions UDAQ TEXTPOSitions BENDtableQ TEXTPOSitions REVISIONTableQ TEXTPOSitions SYSTEMTableQ TEXTPOSitions WELDTableQ TEXTPOSitions SYSTemQ TEXTPOSitions TABlewidths

12.02:98


2.3.69 POSTPROCESS

Note: The following queries are for application use only:

Q TEXTPOSitions TEXT

Tells you the number of user text strings (i.e. ’ABC’strings) positioned.

Q TEXTPOSitions TEXT n

Gives the actual string value for the item at position n inthe list.

Q TEXTPOSitions TEXT text

Gives the details (X, Y coordinates, character heightsetc.) for text.

Q TEXTPOSitions ATTRibute

Number of pipe attributes/UDAs positioned.

Q TEXTPOSitions ATTRibute n

Gives actual attribute of item in position n in the list.

Q TEXTPOSition <att>

Gives details of the named attribute.

Q TEXTPOSitions SYSTEMATTRibute

Gives the number of drawing attributes/UDAs.

Q TEXTPOSitions SYSTEMATTRibute n

Gives the attribute at position n in the list.

Q TEXTPOSitions SYSTEMATTRibute <att>

Gives the details of the named attribute.

Function: Lets you specify up to five system commands which are to beexecuted during ISODRAFT's intermediate transfer fileprocessing.

Description: The PREPROCESS command defines system commands whichwill be executed after the intermediate transfer file has beenwritten and before ISODRAW is invoked. You can define up tofive such commands, each identified by an integer.

Examples: PREPROCESS 2 'any system command' 3 'another command’

Command Syntax: .----------------. / |

>--- PREPROcess -+- integer - text --+-->

Related Commands:

POSTPROCESSPROCESS

12.02:99


2.3.70 PRECISION

2.3.71 PREPROCESS

2.3.72 PROCESS

Function: Sets bore dimensions to be nominal or actual.

Description: Sets bore dimensions to be nominal or actual.

Examples: PRECISION BORES NOMINAL

Sets bore dimensions to be nominal

PRECISION BORES ACTUAL

Sets bore dimensions to be actual

Command Syntax: >--- PRECIsion BORES ---+--- NOMINAL ---.| |‘--- ACTUAL ----+--->

Querying: Q PRECIsion BORES

Function: Lets you specify up to five system commands which are to beexecuted during ISODRAFT's intermediate transfer fileprocessing

Description: The PREPROCESS command defines system commands whichwill be executed after the intermediate transfer file has beenwritten and before ISODRAW is invoked. You can define up to fivesuch commands, each identified by an integer.

Examples: PREPROCESS 2 'any system command' 3 'another command'

Command Syntax: >--- PRECIsion BORES ---+--- NOMINAL ---.| |‘--- ACTUAL ----+--->

Querying:

Function: Instructs ISODRAFT to process a transfer file.

Description: The PROCESS command is used to process a transfer file. Theoperation takes account of any preprocessing or postprocessingactions which have been defined.

Examples: PROCESS TRANS /TRANSFER

Processes a transfer file named /TRANSFER.

12.02:100


2.3.73 PROJECTNUMBER

2.3.74 Query

Command Syntax: >--- PROCess TRANsferfilename filename --->

Related Commands:

PREPROCESS POSTPROCESS

Function: Writes the project number in the title block area.

Description: The PROJECTNUMBER command writes the project numberinto the title block area. A project number of up to 12alphanumeric characters can be used. The default is for noproject number to be shown on the drawings.

If PROJECTNUMBER FROMSYSTEM is specified, the projectnumber shown on entry to the project, and stored within theSystem DB, will be plotted automatically. This text will havebeen set by the System Administrator using ADMIN.

Examples: PROJECTN FRO

The project number will be taken from the system projectnumber.

PROJECTN ‘AA-1234-ZZ’

The project number will be AA-1234-ZZ.

Command Syntax: >--- PROJECTNumber ---+--- text ---------.| |‘--- FROmsystem ---+--->

Querying: Q PROJECTNumber Q OPTIONS

Function: Allows you to find the current settings of various options.

Command Syntax: >--- Query --- option --->The main ISODRAFT options are:

ATTAName ATExt ATExt value

AXES BENDRADius BOLTing

CHARHeight CLLEngthfilename

CONTinuationsymbols

12.02:101


CONTNotes CONTWelds COOrdinates

COORDS CUTMarks CUTPipelistfile

CUTTinglist DATE DELImiter

DETAILList DIMDist DIMEnsions

DTEXts ELEVations EQUIPMENTNumbering

FALLinglines FLOWarrows FRAMe

INSTName INSULationcontrol

ISO

ISOType ITEMcode ITEMcode LENGTH

KEYS KEYSkeynumber

LEGLength

LOOSeflangeallowance

MARGin MARK

MATControl MATEriallist MATListfilename

MESSagefilename MTEXts OPTions

OUTCom OUTComattribute

OUTCom BLANKvalue

OUTPut UNITS OVERALLSKews

PICTurescale

PLOTTingscale PROJECTNumber

REFDIMensions

REPEatbility REServe RETUrnfilename

SIZE SKEWbox SPECBreak

SPLIt SPOOlnumbers

STACkingarrangement

SUPPORTFilename

SUPPorts SYMBolfilename

TAGging TAPping TEXTPOSitions

TEXPOSitions text TITleblock TITleblock value

TOLerance TRACingcontrol TRANsferfilename

TRUNcate TUBESplits UNDerlayplotname

UNITS WASTage WASTage integer

WELDId WELDNumbers WELDType

12.02:102


2.3.75 RECREATE

2.3.76 REFDIMENSIONS

Function: Creates a macro file or binary file which can then be run intoISODRAFT again.

Description: On UNIX workstations, the RECREATE command can be usedto create a macro file which can then be read into ISODRAFTagain to recreate the existing option settings or the detail list.See the Software Customisation Guide for more informationabout writing and using macros. You can also use theRECREATE command to save the screen layout, which canthen be read in again using the INSTALL SETUP command.

RECREATE has other options available in different PDMSmodules. See the relevant Reference Manuals for details.

Examples: RECReate OPTions /OPT OVER

Saves the current option settings in a file named /OPT.Any existing file named /OPT will be overwritten.

RECReate DETAillist /LIST

Saves the detail list in a file named /LIST

RECReate /DISP

Saves the screen display in a file named /DISP.

Related Commands:

INSTALLSETUP

Command Syntax:

>-- RECReate --+----------------.| ||-- OPTions -----|| |‘-- DETAillist --+-- filename --+-- OVERwrite --.

| |‘---------------+-->

Function: Switches the display of reference dimensions on and off.

Description: If reference dimensions have been set up in the DESIGNdatabase, they can be shown on isometric plots by using theREFDIMENSIONS command.

12.02:103


2.3.77 REMOVE

Examples: REFDimensions ON

Displays reference dimensions.

REFDimensions OFF

Reference dimensions are not displayed.

Command Syntax: >--- REFDimensions ---+--- ON ----.| |‘--- OFF ---+--->

Querying: Q REFDIMensionsQ OPTIONS

Function: Removes named elements from the list of items to be processedby the next DETAIL or CHECK command.

Description: The elements to be checked or detailed by ISODRAFT can bedefined before giving the CHECK or DETAIL command bysetting up a Detail List. You add elements to the list using theADD command and remove them using the REMOVEcommand. The next CHECK ALL or DETAIL ALL command actson elements in the current Detail List (that is, all elements in theAdd List except those in the Remove List).

Examples: REMOVE /PIPE3-1 /BRAN3-2-2

Removes the named elements from the Detail List.

REMOVE EMPTY

Empties the Remove List.

Related Commands:

ADD CHECK DETAIL REPEATABILITY

Command Syntax:

.----<------------------------------------------------. / |

>-- REMove ---+--- <gid> ---------------------------------------------|| ||-- SHEETNumber --+--- integer --. || | | || ‘--- SINGle ---+---------. || | ||-- SPOOL --+-- integer --+-- OF integer --| || | | | || | ‘----------------| || | | || ‘-- text ----------------------+-- <gid> ---|| |‘----EMPTY----------------------------------------------+--->

Note: The DETAIL EMPTY also empties the Remove List. Seethe DETAIL command.

12.02:104


2.3.78 REPEATABILITY

Restrictions: • The maximum number of element identifiers allowed in aRemove List is 100.

• The maximum number of items for any single pipe (sheetsor spools) is 20. You can only add sheets for a Pipe whichhas previously been detailed with Repeatability on, so thatsplit points have been stored in the DESIGN database. Seethe REPEATABILITY command.

Querying: Q DETaillist Lists contents of both Add and Remove lists.

Function: Creates split ATTAs at automatically generated split points forsubsequent storage in the DESIGN database.

Description: When a pipe is detailed which needs splitting over more thanone sheet, ISODRAFT automatically generates split points.Normally this data is not stored, and so if the design is alteredand the pipe detailed again, the split points may be in differentplaces.

Repeatability allows you to save these split points in a macro tobe run in DESIGN. This macro stores the split point informationin the DESIGN database. You can then use this information toreplot single sheets when you have made changes to yourdesign which only affect those sheets, keeping the split points inthe same positions as before.

A function in the SPOOLER module allows you to erase this splitpoint information if need be.

Repeatability is not available for system isometrics or equipmenttrims.

Split ATTAs are automatically created at split points, in correctlist order, with correct coordinates. Once in place they areindistinguishable from split ATTAs that have been manuallycreated. They can be repositioned as required. The macro willselect the ATTA using default selectors, and then set itsATTYPE attribute to XXXX. (The macro will be handled in thesame manner as an inter-DB connection macro.)

Note: Prior to Version 10.4, the REPEATABILITY commandalso stored spool identifiers in the database. Thisfunction is now replaced by the SPOOLER modulefunctionality.

Examples: REPE ONREPE OFF

Related Commands:

ADD DETAIL REMOVE SPLIT

12.02:105


2.3.79 RESERVE

Command Syntax: >--- REPEatability ---+--- ON------.| |‘--- OFF* ---+--->

Restrictions: • Split ATTAs will not be automatically created if somealready exist in the pipe.

• Re-ordering branches will destroy the integrity of therepeatability data.

• Repeatability is not available for system isometrics orequipment trims.

Querying: Q REPEATABILITYQ OPTIONS

Function: Allows you to specify a blank area at the bottom of the drawingarea or the Material list.

Description: You can reserve an area at the bottom of the drawing area orMaterial list, which will be left blank when the isometric isplotted. Note that if you want a blank area across the wholesheet, not just the drawing area, you should use the MARGINcommand to specify a large bottom margin.

A reserved area can be used for standard notes, detail PLOTfiles, a company name, etc. or it can be filled by information on abacking sheet using the UNDERLAYPLOT command.

The default is a reserved height of zero; that is, no reservedarea.

Examples: RESERVE 30

Reserves an area 30 units high across the drawing area.

RESERVE 2 INCH

Reserves an area 2 inches high across the drawing area.

RESERVE MAT 30

Reserves an area 30 units high across the bottom of theMaterial list

Related Commands:

MARGIN

Command Syntax: >--- REServe -+-- <uval> --------------------.| |‘-- MATeriallist --- <uval> ---+--->

Querying: Q REServeQ OPTions

12.02:106


2.3.80 SETCOMPDATE

Function: Sets the Comparison Date for an MDB or DB.

Description: Sets the Comparison Date for an MDB or DB. You can set thecomparison date to an actual date, to a stamp, or, for a specificDB, to an exact session number and/or extract number. Thecomparison date can be used in queries and, for example, inChange Highlighting, where it is necessary to specify acomparison date in order to determine which elements havebeen changed since the specified date.

Note: If a stamp is used to set the comparison date, this will setthe comparison session for each database within thestamp. It will also reset any comparison dates setpreviously.

Querying a date will only return a value if the lastSETCOMPDATE command used a date on its own, otherwise itwill return 'unset'. Similarly, querying a stamp is only valid if thelast SETCOMPDATE command used a stamp.

Examples: SETCOMPDATE 10 January 2002

Sets the comparison date to 10 January 2002.

SETCOMPDATE STAMP stamp 016

Sets the comparison date to stamp 016.

Related Commands:

CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING

Command Syntax:

>- SETCOMPDATE -+- <date> -------------------------------------------------------------.|- STAMP - name -------------------------------------------------------|‘- FOR - DB - dbname - TO -+- <date> ----------------------------------|

|- Session - integer - EXTRACT -+- integer -|| '- dbname -||-- Session -- integer ---------------------|‘-- EXTRACT -+- integer --------------------|

‘- dbname ---------------------+->

Querying: Q COMPDATE EXTRACT FOR DB CTBATEST/DESIQ COMPDATE COMPDATE SESSION FOR DB CTBATEST/DESI

12.02:107


2.3.81 SIZE

2.3.82 SKEWBOX

Function: Specifies the overall dimensions of the drawing sheet.

Description: The SIZE command allows you to specify the dimensions of thedrawing sheet; either in current or specified units, or as astandard ISO or American drawing sheet size. The default isISO A2.

ISODRAFT will subtract the current margins and reserved area(if any) before laying out the isometric plot, the material list,frame and title block in the remaining area of the sheet.

Examples: SIZE A3 Specifies ISO A3 size.

SIZE AA Specifies American A size

SIZE H 300 W400

Specifies dimensions 300mm high x 400mmwide (assuming current units are mm).

Related Commands:

MARGIN RESERVE

Command Syntax:

>--- SIZE ---+--- AA ---.| ||--- AB ---|| ||--- AC ---|| ||--- AD ---|| ||--- AE ---+---------------------------------.| ||--- A --- integer --------------------------|| ||--- Height --- value --- Width --- value ---|| |‘--- Width --- value --- Height --- value ---+--->

Restrictions: Standard ISO sizes, as defined by integer, must be in the rangeA0 to A4.

Querying: Q SIZEQ OPTions

Function: Controls how skewed piping is represented.

Description: Any skewed sections of piping, whether or not they involve a fall,can be represented either by full boxes (2D or 3D; see theFALLSKEWS command) or by triangles.

12.02:108


Figure 2:6. Full and triangle skewboxes.

If triangle representation is specified, the following options areavailable:

• The dimensions can be shown in standard form or in a non-standard form.

• The triangle areas can be shown hatched (shaded),partially hatched or unhatched.

• Skew triangles can be tagged with swing angles in thecorners of the triangles. These are output in the firstcorners of the triangles in the direction the line is detailed.

• H and V notes can be output in the right angle corners ofhorizontal (H) and vertical (V) triangles.

• Overall skewboxes, or skewboxes between branches, canbe shown.

Figure 2:7. Standard and non-standard dimensioning styles, and hatching.

Full box Triangle

Standard dimensioning Non-standard dimensioning Hatched

12.02:109


Standard dimensioning shows the horizontal and verticaldimension lines of the triangle standing out from the sides of thetriangle. Non-standard dimensioning shows the dimensioncharacters positioned along the sides of the triangle itself. Thedefault is standard dimensioning.

The default standout distances for the two types ofdimensioning are:

• 13mm line standout for standard dimensioning• 4mm character standout for non-standard dimensioning

By default, skewbox triangles are highlighted by parallel-linehatching with a spacing of 3mm between the hatching lines. Thehatching can be switched off, the spacing altered or an area ofthe triangles selected for hatching.

Note that these standout distances may not be set to the samevalue as other standout distances.

Figure 2:8. Overall and individual skewboxes.

12.02:110


Figure 2:9. Skewed and falling line with hatched triangle skewboxes.

Examples: SKEWBOX FULL

Skews shown by full boxes

SKEWBOX TRIANGLE

Skews shown by triangles with standard dimensioning,13mm (default) standout for dimension lines, and hatchingat 3mm (default) spacing

SKEWBOX TRIANGLE NSTD HATCH OFF STANDOUT 7MM

Skews shown by triangles with non-standard dimensioning(characters along triangle sides), a character standout of7mm, and no hatching

25mm

12.02:111


SKEWBOX TRIANGLE STANDOUT 20MM HATCH PART 25

Skews shown by triangles with standard dimensioning, adimensioning line standout of 20mm, and partial hatchingat standard spacing for a length of 25mm (being themaximum height that the shading will reach).

SKEWBOX TRIANGLE TAGS ANGLES

Skews shown by triangles with standard dimensioning,13mm (default) standout for dimension lines, and hatchingat 3mm (default) spacing, with swing angles shown in thefirst corners

Related Commands:

FALLINGLINES FALLSKEWS OVERALLSKEWSDIMDISTANCE

Command Syntax:

>- SKEWbox -+-- FULL ----.| |‘- TRIangle -+- NSTD --. .-----------------------------------------.

| |/ |‘---------*- HATCH -+- <uval> -+- PART/IAL -+- <uval>-|

| | | | || | | ‘- OFF ---|| | | || | ‘----------------------|| | || |-- OFF --------------------------|| | || |-- DEFault ----------------------|| | || ‘---------------------------------|| ||-- STANdout --+-- <uval> ------------------|| | || |-- DEFault -----------------|| | || ‘----------------------------|| ||-- TAGS ------+-- ANGles --. || | | || |-- HV ------| || | | || |-- ON ------| || | | || ‘-- OFF -----+---------------|| |‘-------------------------------------------+>

Querying: Q SKEWboxQ OPTIONS

12.02:112


2.3.83 SPECBREAK

Function: Specifies the level at which a change of pipeline specification isnoted, and which changes are recorded on the isometric.

Description: Pipeline specification changes are indicated by notes againstthe corresponding points on the isometric plot. By default,specification changes are noted at component level, but theycan be noted at Branch level instead.

SPECBREAK BRANCH causes only changes in the Branchspecification to be recognised.

SPECBREAK COMPONENT causes the Branch specification tobe ignored and changes to be recognised only in the componentattributes LSTUBE or SPREF, or in the Branch attributeHSTUBE .

The format in which a specification change is shown is that boththe original and new specifications are shown at each point ofchange. The format is similar to that used for dimensioning.

SPECBREAK can be further modified to output specificationchanges for material, insulation, tracing, paint, and (up to) fiveuser-defined specifications. By default, only specificationchanges for Pipe will be output. By switching SPECCHANGESto ON, you can output the other changes.

The following Atext defaults are associated with the specificationbreaks on the drawing area:

Specification Specification ATEXT

Spec Break ATEXT

Pipeline name 288 ‘PIPE’ 288 ‘PIPE’

Material spec 253 ‘PIPINGSPEC’

289 ‘MATL’

Insulation spec 270 ‘THERMALINSULATIONSPEC’

290 ‘INSUL’

Tracing spec 271 ‘TRACINGSPEC’

291 ‘TRACE’

Painting spec 272 ‘PAINTINGSPEC’

292 ‘PAINT’

User defined 293 to 297 null 293 to 297 nullstring

12.02:113


2.3.84 SPLIT

Examples: SPECB COMP

Recognises changes in component specifications only.

SPECB BRAN

Recognises changes in branch specifications only.

SPECB BRAN SPECC ON

Recognises changes in branch specifications only, andoutputs specification changes for insulation, tracing andpaint.

Command Syntax: >- SPECBreak -+- COMPonent* -.| |‘- BRANch -----+- SPECChanges -+- ON ---.

| | || ‘- OFF* -+| |‘------------------------+>

Querying: Q SPECBreakQ OPTions

Function: Controls the number of drawing sheets used when a pipeline issplit over more than one sheet.

Description: If a pipeline is too long or complex to fit on a single isometricplot, ISODRAFT will automatically split the pipeline overseparate drawings. Each drawing will be identified as DRG 1 OF..., DRG 2 OF ..., etc. You can control the relative complexity ofeach drawing, or the number of drawings into which theisometric is to be split, by using the SPLIT command.

You can control splitting either by giving a split factor, or byspecifying the number of drawings used for the isometric.

The default value of the split factor is 100. Note that this valuedoes not relate directly to either the number of fittings or theamount of text on a sheet. It is a measure of the complexity ofthe drawing, relative to its size, on an arbitrary scale.

Greater sheet complexity is specified by giving a split factorgreater than 100, and lower complexity by giving a split factorless than 100.

You can control exactly where pipes are split by using SplitATTAs in the design. If user-defined positions for splits havebeen created in the design, ISODRAFT will always use theseand not calculate its own split points.

Split points in tube can be controlled by the TUBESPLITScommand.

12.02:114


2.3.85 SPOOLNUMBERS

Examples: SPLIt 3 DRwgs

Splits the isometric into 3 drawings.

SPLIt 75 PERCent

Splits the isometric so that the complexity of each drawingis 75% of the default.

Related Commands:

ERASE REPEATABILITY TUBESPLITS

Restrictions: Only single pipelines can be split into a fixed number ofdrawings.

Command Syntax: >--- SPLIt --- value ---+--- DRwgs -----.| |‘--- PERCent ---+--->

The default is 100 percent.

Querying: Q SPLITQ OPTions

Function: Specifies how individual pipe spools are identified on isometrics.

Description: SPOOLER can generate spool numbers per spool drawing.These spool numbers are stored in the Fabrication DB and canbe imported into ISODRAFT by using the FROMDB command.

If you don‘t use the FROMDB option but switch spool numberingon, ISODRAFT will number the spools. These numbers are notmaintained between sessions. The parameters that ISODRAFTuses to number spools are as follows:

• Spools are numbered sequentially from the start of thepipeline. If a Tee is encountered, numbering continuesdown the off-line leg before returning to the main linesequence.

• Spools are identified on the isometric plot by spool numbersplotted in square brackets, e.g. [8], on the first leg of a pipe.They are also listed at the end of the material list.

• By default, spools are numbered continuously from onedrawing to the next. The command SPOOLNUMBERSPERDrawing causes spool numbering to be restarted at 1on each new drawing sheet. For details of how to plot pipespools on separate drawing sheets, see the ISOTYPEcommand.

• The PREFIX option can be used to combine the spoolnumbers with either user-specified text or the SPLPattribute of Pipe and Drawing in DESIGN. ISODRAFT caninsert generated sheet and spool numbers into a user-defined spool name if wildcard characters * are included inthe text.

12.02:115


Examples: SPOOLN FROMDB

The spool numbers generated in the SPOOLER modulewill be used by ISODRAFT in the isometric plot and spoollist.

SPOOLN PREF FROMDB

The spool numbers will be generated, with the prefix takenfrom the DESIGN SPLP attribute.

SPOOLN ON

Spool numbers are generated by ISODRAFT and shownon the pipes and below the material list.

SPOOLN OFF

Spool numbers are not shown at all.

SPOOLN PREF ‘Tube Spec:’ PERD

Spool numbers will be shown below the material list, andthe prefix will be included in all spool numbers in thedrawing area. Spool numbering will restart at 1 on eachnew drawing sheet.

SPOOLN PREF ‘/PIPE1/DRE*/SPL*’

Spool numbers will be shown below the material list, andthe sheet and spool numbers will be written into the prefixname. So, for example, the identifier PIPE1/DRG2/SPL3will be generated automatically for spool 3 of drawing 2 ofPIPE1. This format can only be used with theSPOOLNUMBERS PERDRAWING option.

Related Commands:

ISOTYPE

Command Syntax:

>-- SPOOlnumbers --+-- PREFix - + - text ----.| | || ‘ - FROMDB -+- PERDrawing --.| | || ‘---------------|| ||-- PERDrawing --+-- PREFix - + - text ---|| | | || | ‘- FROMDB --|| ‘------------------------|| ||-- FROMDB -------------------------------|| ||-- ON* ----------------------------------|| |‘-- OFF ----------------------------------+-->

Note: * Spool numbers are generated for each isometric, withno relationship to any data stored in the databases.

12.02:116


2.3.86 STACKINGARRANGEMENT

Restrictions: The maximum number of spools per pipe is 99.

The maximum length of the spool prefix is 40 characters.

Querying: Q SPOOLNumbersQ OPTions

Function: Positioning multiple plots on the paper.

Description: When you are using multiple PLOT files, you can specify thelayout of the individual plots on the paper. You can align theplots along the paper, that is with their long sides parallel to thelength of the paper, or across the paper, that is with their shortsides parallel to the length of the paper. You can specify howmany drawings should be plotted in the given direction.

The default format is STACKINGARRANGEMENT 1 ALONGwhich produces a single row of drawings with their long sidesaligned with the length of the paper.

Note that you must ensure that there is enough room across thewidth of the paper for the arrangement you have specified. Thelength of the paper is specified in the FILE command.

The stacking facility has no meaning, and is ignored, whensingle PLOT files are used.

Examples: STACK 2 ACROSS

will orientate the drawing frames across the width of thepaper, two abreast:

direction of paper movement

12.02:117


2.3.87 SUPPORTFILENAME

STACK 3 ALONG

will orient the drawing frames along the width of the paper,three high:

Related Commands:

FILE SIZE

Command Syntax: >--- STACkingarrangement -- value --+--- ALONg ---.| ||--- ACROss ---|| |‘--------------+-->

Querying: Q STACkingarrangementQ OPTions

direction of paper movement

Function: Specifies the name of a file to which a pipe support schedule isto be sent.

Description: Specifies the name of a file to which a pipe support schedule isto be sent. If the OVERWRITE option is included, any existingfile of the given name will be overwritten by the new scheduledata.

Examples: SUPPORTF /SUP1

Sends the pipe support schedule to a file named SUP1.

SUPPORTF /SUP1 OVER

Overwrites the pipe support schedule in the file SUP1.

SUPPORTF OFF

Stops the pipe support schedule being written to a file.

Command Syntax: >--- SUPPORTFilename --+-- name --+-- OVERwrite --.| | || ‘---------------|| |‘--- OFF* -----------------+-->

12.02:118


2.3.88 SUPPORTS

2.3.89 SYMBOLFILENAME

Restrictions: For system isometrics, no information will be written to thesupport file

Querying: Q SUPPORTFilename Q OPTions

Function: Defines whether support positions are dimensioned as overall orstring dimensions, and whether supports are shown at all on theisometric.

Description: Support positions may be dimensioned in one of two ways,overall or string. The default is SUPPORTS STRING. Supportinformation can also be omitted completely from the isometrics.

Note that the position of support dimensions, that is whetherthey are on the same side or the opposite side to the string orcomposite dimensions, is controlled by the DIMENSIONSHANGERS command.

Examples: SUPPorts OVErall

Supports dimensioned from previous support.

SUPPorts STRing

Supports dimensioned from previous component.

SUPPorts OFF

No support information shown.

Related Commands:

DIMENSIONS DIMDIST

Command Syntax: >--- SUPPorts ---+--- STRing* ---.| ||--- OVErall ---|| |‘--- OFF -------+--->

Querying: Q SUPPortsQ OPTions

Function: Specifies the name of a symbol library.

Description: The SYMBOLFILENAME command loads a file of user-definedsymbols previously created in PDMS DRAFT. You can definethis file as read-only if you want to protect the symbol definitionsfrom subsequent modification.

12.02:119


2.3.90 TAGGING

2.3.91 TAPPING

Examples: SYMBOLF /SYMFILE1

Command Syntax: >- SYMBOLFilename -+- filename -+- READONLY -.| | || |- WRITE* ---|| | || ‘------------+->‘- OFF ->

Querying: Q SYMBOLFilename

Lists the name and contents of the current symbol library. It willnot tell you what the listed symbols look like.

Function: Allows you to identify individual components on the isometricplot by means of name tags.

Description: By default, component names are not plotted. Fittings of generictype INST, VALV, FILT, PCOM, TRAP, VENT, VTWA and VFWAcan have their PDMS names (if they have them) shown againsttheir plotted symbols on the isometric.

If a component of a valid type exists in the pipeline but has notbeen named when TAGGING ON is specified, ISODRAFT willrecognise that it has a system name only and will not plot anyname. However, if ITEMCODE ON has been specified thecomponent will be labelled with its itemcode.

Related Commands:

INSTNAME ITEMCODE

Command Syntax: >--- TAGging ---+--- ON -----.| |‘--- OFF* ---+--->

Querying: Q TAGgingQ OPTions

Function: Sets the scale of the tapping leg and switches tapping legdimensions and coordinates on and off.

Description: The TAPPING command controls the display and scale oftapping branches, that is offline connections to PCOMs, SHUs,Flanges and Filters.

12.02:120


2.3.92 TEXTPOSITIONSee POSITION command.

Examples: TAPping SCALe 75

Sets the scale of the tapping leg to 75% of the defaultvalue.

TAPping SCALe DEFault

Resets the default scale.

TAPping DIM ON

Switches tapping leg dimensions on.

TAPping DIM OFF

Switches tapping leg dimensions off.

TAPping DIM DEF

Reset to the default, which is dimensioning ON.

TAPping COORDS ON

Switches tapping leg coordinates on.

TAPping COOR OFF

Switches tapping leg coordinates off.

TAPping COORDS DEF

Resets to the default, which is coordinates off.

TAPping DEFault

Resets all tapping defaults, which sets the scale to 100%,dimensioning to ON and plotting to OFF.

Command Syntax: .-----------------<--------------------./ |

>-- TAPping --*--- SCALe ---+--- value -----. || | | || ‘--- DEFault ---+----------|| ||--- DIMensions ----. || | ||--- COORdinates ---| || | ||--- COORDS --------+--- ON -------------|| | || |--- OFF ------------|| | || ‘--- DEFault --------|| |‘----------------------- DEFault --------+->

Querying: Q TAPPIngQ OPTIONS

12.02:121


2.3.93 TITLEBLOCK

Function: Allows you to add extra text to the title block.

Description: The title block is produced automatically. Extra text can beadded to the title block by using the TITLEBLOCK command,followed by the line number and the text to be added.

Title block lines can be input in any order.

You can underline a line of text by putting the _ character(underscore) at the end of the line.

You can create a vertical bar from the previous horizontal linedown to the next horizontal line by putting the | character(vertical bar) in the text.

ISODRAFT will accept a maximum of 25 title block lines. Eachline may contain up to 39 characters (including spaces, butexcluding the underscore character).

Examples: The following sequence will add the text illustrated below:

TITLE 1 ’THIS IS AN EXAMPLE OF THE EXTRA’ TITLE 2 ’TITLE BLOCK INFORMATION’ TITLE 4 ’A VERTICAL LINE WITH |’TITLE 3 ’TO UNDERLINE USE THE UNDERSCORE _’

Related Commands:

DATE POSITION

Command Syntax: >--- TITleblock --- value ---+--- text ---.| |‘-------------+--->

Querying: Q TITleblockQ TITleblock valueQ OPTions

THIS IS AN EXAMPLE OF THE EXTRATITLE BLOCK INFORMATIONTO UNDERLINE USE THE UNDERSCOREA VERTICAL LINE WITH

ISS: 1

DRG NO1 OF 2

DATE: 24 JUL 87

PROJECT NO: VC12

BATCH REF: A16 /OG8 /CG14

PIPING SPEC: PS20

0-4201

12.02:122


2.3.94 TOLERANCE

Function: Specifies the maximum misalignment between componentsregarded as having the same axis.

Description: By default, two components will be plotted as though they havea common axis if the orientation of their axes differs by less than0.06 degrees, or if their axes are offset by less than 1.00mm.

The TOLERANCE command allows you to specify a differentalignment tolerance, either as an angular difference or as alinear offset.

Examples: TOL OFFSET 0.125 INCH

Two components will be plotted as having a common axisif their axes are offset by less than 0.125 inch.

TOL ANGLE 0.15

Two components will be plotted as having a common axisif the orientations of their axes differ by less than 0.15degrees.

TOL DEFAULT

Resets the default values of 1mm offset or 0.06 degreesangular difference.

Restrictions: If gaskets of less than 1mm thickness are detailed, a toleranceoffset of less than the gasket thickness must be set.

Care should be taken when specifying non-default values, sincelarge tolerances can cause falling lines to be shown incorrectly.For reliable plotting of falling and skewed lines, a lower valuethan the default (say TOL OFF 0.01) may be appropriate.

Command Syntax: >--- TOLerance ---+--- OFFset --- <uval> ---.| ||--- ANGle --- value -----|| |‘--- DEFault -------------+--->

Querying: Q TOLeranceQ OPTions

12.02:123


2.3.95 TRACINGCONTROL

Function: Specifies whether or not tracing is to be plotted.

Description: Any piping component which has its TSPEC attribute set may beshown traced.

Insulation and tracing can be shown:• On tubing only• On tubing and pipe components

By default, tracing is not identified on the isometric.

The name of the insulation and/or tracing specification will beshown in the title block.

Examples: TRAC ON

Shows tracing on the tube only, not on the pipe

TRAC TUBE

components.

TRAC ALL

Shows tracing on both tube and components.

TRAC OFF

Suppresses the display of tracing.

The default is TRACINGCONTROL TUBE.

Related Commands:

INSULATIONCONTROL

Command Syntax: >------ TRACingcontrol -------+--- ON ------.| ||--- TUBE* ---|| ||--- ALL -----|| |‘--- OFF -----+--->

Querying: Q TRACingcontrolQ OPTions

12.02:124


2.3.96 TRANSFERFILENAME

2.3.97 TRUNCATE

Function: Allows you to save a transfer file generated during ISODRAFT’sdata extraction operations, for subsequent processing.

Description: The transfer file is not normally visible to you, but it can becopied into an ASCII file by using the TRANsferfilenamecommand.

Any transfer file which currently exists with the specifiedfilename will be overwritten by the new file resulting from thenext DETAIL or CHECK command.

Note that transfer files produced by versions of ISODRAFTbefore Version 10.3 are in binary format and cannot beprocessed by the PROCESS TRANSFERFILE command.

Examples: TRANSFER /TRANS

Saves the transfer file as a file named TRANS.

TRANSFER OFF

No transfer file will be produced.

Related Commands:

PROCESS

Command Syntax: >--- TRANsferfilename ---+--- filename ---.| |‘--- OFF --------+--->

where filename is the name of a file in your working directory.

Querying: Q TRANSferfilenameQ OPTIONS

Function: Stops rounding remainders of dimensioning being added to thenext dimension.

Description: When dimensioned isometrics are plotted, all dimensions arerounded up or down to the nearest mm or 1/16 inch, dependingon the current output units. By default, ISODRAFT carries overany remainder (positive or negative) from a rounded dimensionand adds it to the adjacent dimension. This process minimisescumulative errors over a number of consecutive dimensions, butit can result in identical fittings being shown with different lengths(usually differing by 1mm or 1/16 inch).

12.02:125


2.3.98 TTFONT

You can specify that ISODRAFT is to truncate all dimensions.The remainders from rounding of the individual dimensions willthen be discarded rather than added to the next dimension.Remember that this can result in a significant cumulative errorover long pipelines with many individually dimensionedcomponents.

Examples: TRUNcate ON

TRUNcate OFF

TRUNcate DEFault

Truncates dimensions.

Does not truncate dimensions

Does not truncate dimensions.

Command Syntax: >--- TRUNcate ---+--- ON --------.| ||--- OFF* ------|| |‘--- DEFault ---+--->

Querying: Q TRUNcateQ OPTIONS

Function: Allows the user to choose a font type for all the text on theisometric (including material description).

Description: Different font types can be defined in the Admin module by theuser. The user can then choose one of the defined font types.One of the available types is used as the default type when theoption is on. The feature can be used for all the output formats.

Examples: TTFONT OFF

True type fonts are not used.

TTFONT ON

Selected true type font is used.

TTFONT 5

Times New Roman font type as defined in Admin.

TTFONT 6

Arial font type as defined in Admin.

TTFONT NONE

True type font are not defined in Admin

12.02:126


2.3.99 TUBESPLITS

Command Syntax: >- TTFONT -+---+- ON --.| | || '- OFF -+-->|+- integer --+| || || |‘- NONE -----+------>

Querying: Q TTFONT

Function: Controls how splits in tube are placed.

Description: ISODRAFT may generate splits in tube. You can use theTUBESPLITS command to output a message if this happens, orto stop isometrics with splits in tube being produced.

Examples: TUBES OFF

This command will allow generation of isometrics withsplits in tube, but the message UNACCEPTABLE SPLITPOINT will be displayed. Repeatability information will notbe updated.

TUBES OFF NOP

Will prevent the generation of isometrics with splits in tube.The message UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT will bewritten to the message file and the pipeline will berejected. Repeatability information will not be updated.

TUBES ON

Returns to the default condition of allowing splits in tube.

Command Syntax: >-- TUBESplits --+-- ON ---------------------.| |‘-- OFF --+-----------------|

| |‘--- NOPicture ---+--->

Querying: Q TUBESPLITSQ OPTIONS

12.02:127


2.3.100 UNDERLAYPLOTNAME

Function: Allows you to plot ISODRAFT’s output on top of backgroundplots previously created in a PDMS drawing module.

Description: You can superimpose an ISODRAFT PLOT file onto anunderlay plot. This facility is used, for example, for underprintingisometric plots with company-standard drawing sheetinformation. You can specify up to eight underlay plots, givingthem numbers so that they can be switched off if required.

Examples: UNDERLAY /BKGRNDS/STYLE1

The drawing stored in the file /BKGRNDS/STYLE1 will beplotted on the same sheet as the next isometric plot. Bydefault, this will be underlay number 1.

UNDERLAY /BKGRNDS/STYLE2 2

The drawing stored in file /BKGRNDS/STYLE2 will beplotted on the same sheet as the next isometric plot.

UNDERLAY OFF

The plot given as underlay 1 will not be plotted with thenext isometric plot.

UNDERLAY OFF 2

The plot given as underlay 2 will not be plotted with thenext isometric plot.

UNDERLAY OFF ALL

No underlay will be plotted.

Related Commands:

MARGIN RESERVE

Command Syntax: >--- UNDerlayplotname --+-- filename --+-- integer --.| | || ‘-------------|| |‘--- OFF ------+-- integer --|

| ||-- ALL ------|| |‘-------------+->

Restrictions: The underlay plots must have the same sheet size as thatspecified for the ISODRAFT output. If not, the command will beignored.

Querying: Q UNDerlayplotnameQ UNDerlayplotname integerQ OPTions

12.02:128


2.3.101 UNITS

Function: Specifies units of measurement used for ISODRAFT’s output.

Description: The units used for length and bore dimensions on isometricdrawings can be specified independently from the units used forinput data.

By default, lengths along pipelines (for componentdimensioning, tube lengths, etc.) are shown in metric units, andpipe bores are shown in imperial units.

Note: That input units are specified by the commands BORESand DISTANCES.

Examples: UNITS METRIC

Outputs metric lengths and metric bores.

UNITS IMPERIAL

Outputs imperial lengths and imperial bores.Measurements between 1’ and 2’ will be output in inches;for example, 15”.

UNITS IMPERIAL FT

Outputs imperial lengths and imperial bores.Measurements between 1’ and 2’ will be output in feet andinches; for example, 1’3”.

UNITS METIMP

Outputs metric lengths and imperial bores.

Related Commands:

BORES DISTANCES

Command Syntax: >--- UNIts ---+--- METRic -----.| ||--- IMPerial ---+--- FT ---.| | || ‘----------|| |‘--- METImp* ---------------+--->

Querying: Q OUTPut UNItsQ OPTions

Note: Q UNITS gives the current units for input measurements(see BORE and DISTANCE commands), not outputmeasurements.

12.02:129


2.3.102 WASTAGE AREA

Function: Defines wastage areas which can be given different wastagefactors for cut pipe lengths.

Description: When cut pipe lengths are calculated, ISODRAFT can includeextra material to allow for wastage during cutting andfabrication. A complete Plant can be split up into a maximum often wastage areas, numbered 0 to 9, and each wastage areacan be allocated a wastage factor.

• Default values for the wastage factors for areas 1-9 are all1.

• The wastage factor for area 0 is fixed at 1 (i.e. no wastageallowance).

ISODRAFT uses the wastage factors to modify the cut pipelengths as follows:

• In the DESIGN database, the EREC attribute for a pipebranch can be set to an integer, which corresponds to thewastage area for all tube in the Branch. EREC=10 istreated as area 0, EREC=11 is treated as area 1, and soon.

• Each tube item may have, included in its Specification, astandard wastage allowance (PWAS) in the form of anadded percentage.

• When calculating a cut pipe length, ISODRAFT multipliesthe standard wastage allowance (PWAS) for theappropriate type of tube by the wastage factor for the areain which the length occurs (determined by the EREC for thebranch).

• The corrected percentage allowance thus calculated is thenadded to the nominal length of the pipe to give the cutlength which is plotted on the drawing.

Note: That a cut pipe list is only output if you have given theCUTTINGLIST command.

Examples: Consider a length of pipe connecting two components whoseseparation measured along the pipe centreline is 1000mm.Assume that the tube specification has PWAS set to 10; that is,a 10% allowance is preset. Assume that the pipe length formspart of a branch for which the EREC attribute has been set to 3.Assume that the wastage factor for wastage area 3 has been setto 1.2 by using the command

WASTAGE AREA 3 1.2

Then the wastage allowance calculated by ISODRAFT will be (1000 x 10% x 1.2) mm, i.e. 120mm, and the cut pipe lengthgiven on the isometric will be 1120mm.

Command Syntax: .-------------<----------./ |

>--- WASTage ---*--- ARea integer value ---+--->

12.02:130


2.3.103 WELDANGLES

Restrictions: ISODRAFT only includes a wastage allowance if WASTAGEAREA has been set. The default is for no allowance, even ifPWAS has been set.

Querying: Q WASTage

Q WASTage integer

Q OPTIONS

shows value for the area numberqueried

Function: Allows configuration in which one pipe is welded to another pipeor component such that the flow directions of the two objects arenon-parallel.

Description: The WELDANGLES command takes effect for configurations inwhich one pipe is welded to another pipe or component suchthat the flow directions of the two objects are non-parallel.Toggling between the two states WELDANGLES ON andWELDANGLES OFF allows the User to switch on/off thefunctionality to accommodate oriented welds. The option may beset on/off by the new toggle switch labelled 'Oriented weldangles' on the Dimensioning Options form. The stateWELDANGLES ON requires that the User also specify aminimum weld angle, WELDANGMIN (expressed in degrees),as being the minimum angle at which the change of direction beconsidered significant. In other words, for all angles greater thanor equal to that specified, the new behaviour for oriented weldsoccurs; otherwise, the old behaviour (equivalent toWELDANGLES OFF), occurs. If the user specifiesWELDANGLES ON, but does not specify a value forWELDANGMIN, the default value of 0.1° is used. The value ofWELDANGMIN may be entered in the text box labelled'Minimum weld angle' on the Dimensioning Options form. Notethat if the component welded to a pipe in such a non-parallelconfiguration is of generic type (GTYPE) instrument (INST) or isan eccentric reducer, the WELDANGLES ON option will have noeffect.

Examples WELDANGLES OFF

Disables correct handling of oriented welds.

WELDANGLES ON WELDANGMIN 0.25

Enables correct handling of oriented welds for anglesgreater than or equal to 0.25°.

12.02:131


2.3.104 WELDID

2.3.105 WELDNUMBERS

Command Syntax: >-- WELDANGles --+-- ON -+- WELDANGmin - value --.| | || `-----------------------|| |`-- OFF ------------------------+->

Querying: Q WELDAnglesQ OPTions

Function: Allows you to identify individual welds on the isometric by name.

Description: Welds which have their NAME attribute set in the DESIGNdatabase can have their names plotted against their symbols onthe isometric.

By default, weld names are not shown on the isometric plot.

Related Commands:

TAGGING WELDNUMBERS WELDTYPE

Command Syntax: >--- WELDId ---+--- ON -----.| |‘--- OFF* ---+--->

Querying: Q WELDIdQ OPTions

Function: Numbering the welds on an isometric.

Description: The SPOOLER module allows you to set weld numbersautomatically, and store these numbers in the DESIGNdatabase. If this feature is used it applies to an individual pipe,individual branch or to a spool drawing as defined in theSPOOLER module.

The WELDNUMBERS FROMDB command allows you toaccess these numbers from the DESIGN database. When usingthis feature, if ISODRAFT finds any unnumbered welds itdisplays an error message and halts the drawing of theisometric.

If the weld numbering feature of DESIGN or SPOOLER has notbeen used, ISODRAFT can produce weld numbers according toits own system defaults. However, these numbers are notmaintained between revisions.

12.02:132


Whether you generate weld numbers in DESIGN, SPOOLER orin ISODRAFT, the size of the weld number characters can bespecified using the CHARHeight setting. A table of the weldnumbers can also be output onto the drawing sheet. The type ofweld to be numbered can be fabrication only, erection only, orboth. Weld numbering can be switched off completely, which isthe default.

Additional welds can be shown on the isometric either inindividual balloons or, if there are more than a specified numberof them, as an arrowed message in a single ellipse (with thenumbers separated by slashes).

Note: That if you used the SPOOLER module to generate weldnumbers, you can output a weld table on the isometric toyour own specifications using the POSITION command.For generated weld numbers, the table has a fixedposition and content.

Examples: WELDN CHARH 1.5 FAB

Outputs fabrication weld numbers with a character heightof 1.5mm.

WELDN CHARH 1.8 EREC BOX

Outputs erection weld numbers with a character height of1.8mm, and tabulates them in a box immediately abovethe title block.

WELDN CHARH 2.0 BOX

Outputs all weld numbers with a character height of2.0mm in a table.

WELDN OFF

Suppresses the output of weld numbers.

WELDN FAB FROMDB

Outputs fabrication weld numbers from the DESIGNdatabase.

WELD CHARH 2 FAB AWELD BALLO 6

Output includes numbers for additional fabrication welds.These will be shown in separate balloons if there are nomore than 6, otherwise they will be shown together in anellipse.

Related Commands:

POSITION WELDID WELDTYPE

Command Syntax:

12.02:133


Whether you generate weld numbers in DESIGN, SPOOLER orin ISODRAFT, the size of the weld number characters can bespecified using the CHARHeight setting. A table of the weldnumbers can also be output onto the drawing sheet. The type ofweld to be numbered can be fabrication only, erection only, orboth. Weld numbering can be switched off completely, which isthe default.

Additional welds can be shown on the isometric either inindividual balloons or, if there are more than a specified numberof them, as an arrowed message in a single ellipse (with thenumbers separated by slashes).

Note: That if you used the SPOOLER module to generate weldnumbers, you can output a weld table on the isometric toyour own specifications using the POSITION command.For generated weld numbers, the table has a fixedposition and content.

Examples: WELDN CHARH 1.5 FAB

Outputs fabrication weld numbers with a character heightof 1.5mm.

WELDN CHARH 1.8 EREC BOX

Outputs erection weld numbers with a character height of1.8mm, and tabulates them in a box immediately abovethe title block.

WELDN CHARH 2.0 BOX

Outputs all weld numbers with a character height of2.0mm in a table.

WELDN OFF

Suppresses the output of weld numbers.

WELDN FAB FROMDB

Outputs fabrication weld numbers from the DESIGNdatabase.

WELD CHARH 2 FAB AWELD BALLO 6

Output includes numbers for additional fabrication welds.These will be shown in separate balloons if there are nomore than 6, otherwise they will be shown together in anellipse.

Related Commands:

POSITION WELDID WELDTYPE

Command Syntax:

12.02:134


2.3.106 WELDTYPE

>- WELDNumbers -+- OFF ----------.| ||- ON -----------|| |‘— CHARH- value -+- FABricationonly -.

| ||- ERECtiononly ----|| |‘-------------------+- GENerated -.

| ||- FROMDB ----|| |‘-------------+

|- NOBOX -.| ||- BOX ---|| |‘---------+--.

|.----------------------------------<--------------------------------------'|‘--+- AWELD -+- BALLOon value -.

| | || |- ELLIPse -------|| | || ‘- OFF -----------+| |‘---------------------------+->

Querying: Q WELDNumbersQ OPTIONS

Function: Controls which types of end connection are to be shown onisometric drawings.

Description: By default, all types of end connection are shown on isometrics.The WELDTYPE command specifies whether all endconnections, no end connections, only shop status endconnections or only site status end connections will be shown.

Examples: WELDType FABrication

Only shop status end connections will be shown.

WELDType SITE

Only site status end connections will be shown.

WELDType ON

All types of end connection will be shown.

WELDType OFF

No end connections will be shown.

WELDType FORCesite

Shows all end connections as if they were shop status endconnections. For example, force site welds will be shownas fabrication welds.

12.02:135


2.3.107 ZEROLENGTHSKEWS

Command Syntax: >--- WELDType ---+--- ON* -----------.| ||--- OFF -----------|| ||--- SITE ----------|| ||--- FABrication ---|| |‘--- FORCesite -----+--->

Querying: Q WELDTypeQ OPTIONS

Function: Allows you to connect a vertical Branch to a falling line.

When modelling falling lines containing Butt Weld Tees or Olets,you can position a zero-length variable-angle bend at the offlinep-point of each Tee or Olet.

Description: If falling lines containing Butt Weld Tees or Olets are modelledwith zero-length variable-angle bends at the offline p-point ofeach Tee or Olet, you can connect a vertical Branch. TheZEROLENGTHSKEWS command suppresses dimensioningskewboxes for Butt Weld Tees or Olets in falling lines if zero-length bends have been included in the model.

Bends at Tees or Olets will only be considered as zero-length ifthey are less than 0.5mm long. Bends with dimensions greaterthan this will be detailed as normal components.

Examples: ZEROlengthskews ON

Output skewboxes at vertical connections to falling lines.

ZEROlengthskews OFF

Suppress skewboxes at vertical connections to fallinglines.

Related Commands:

FALLINGLINES

Command Syntax: >--- ZEROlengthskews ---+--- ON* ---.| |‘--- OFF ---+--->

12.02:136

ISODRAFT Reference ManualSymbol Keys

3 Symbol Keys

Note: How to define symbol keys is described in the chapter Symbol Keys, of theISODRAFT User Guide.

3.1 IntroductionThis appendix lists the symbol key (i.e. the SKEY text attribute) and the plotted symbolused to identify each type of component on isometric drawings. There is a section for eachgeneric type. The sections are in alphabetic order of generic type:

BEND (see ELBOw) See ELBO or BEND Symbol Keys.

CAP See CAP Symbol Keys.

CLOSure See CLOS Symbol Keys.

COUPling See COUP Symbol Keys.

CROSs See CROS Symbol Keys.

ELBOw See ELBO or BEND Symbol Keys.

FBLInd (Blind Flange) See FBLI Symbol Keys.

FILTer See FILT Symbol Keys.

FLANge See FLAN Symbol Keys.

FTUBe (Fixed-lengthTube)

See FTUB Symbol Keys.

INSTrument See INST Symbol Keys.

LJSEnd (Lap Joint, StubEnd)

See LJSE Symbol Keys.

OLET (see TEE) See TEE or OLET Symbol Keys.

PCOMponent(Pipe Component)

See PCOM Symbol Keys

REDUcer See REDU Symbol Keys.

SHU See SHU Symbol Keys.

TEE See TEE or OLET Symbol Keys.

12.03:1


Symbol Key Reference Index is an alphabetical list of symbol keys cross-referenced to thegeneric types of the components to which they refer.The following information is given foreach SKEY:

3.1.1 P-pointsWhen you define piping components in PARAGON, you must remember the following rulesso that ISODRAFT can produce isometrics correctly:

• P0 is automatically set and defines the origin of the component.• For two-way components, the arrive and leave p-points must be numbered P1 and P2

(not necessarily in that order). For two-way valves, the spindle direction must beindicated by P3.

• For three-way components, the offline leg must be indicated by P3. The spindledirection for three-way valves must be specified by using a p-point greater than P3,which must have its bore unset.

• For four-way components, the two straight-through flows must have p-points P1/P2and P3/P4. The spindle direction for four-way valves must be specified by using a p-point greater than P4, which must have its bore unset.

• For eccentric reducers without a connection point, the flat side must be indicatedby P3. Eccentric reducers with a connection point must use P3, with a valid boreset, to indicate the connection point and must use P9, with bore unset, for orientation ofthe flat side.

TRAP See TRAP Symbol Keys.

UNIOn See UNIO Symbol Keys.

UNIVersal See UNIVERSAL Symbol Key.

VALVe See VALV Symbol Keys.

VENT See VENT Symbol Keys.

VFWAy (Four-way Valve) See VFWA Symbol Keys.

VTWAy (Three-way valve) See VTWA Symbol Keys.

WELD See WELD Symbol Keys.

FLOR (Pipe through floor) See Floor Penetration ATTA Symbol.

Component description The actual component description

SKEY A four-letter identifier

Plotted symbol The symbol plotted on isometrics, plus dimensions (inmm)

P-points The position and direction of the P-points with respect tothe plotted symbol. P-points needed to specifycomponents fully are shown against the symbols. P-pointswhich are optional are not shown, but their effects areexplained in the notes when appropriate.

Notes The numbers in the right-hand column refer to the notesat the end of each section.

12.03:2


• For U-bends (defined as bends of more than 135 degrees), the p-points must be set asshown for each symbol.

3.2 CAP Symbol Keys

Note:

1. The p-point configurations refer only to Caps used solely for blanking and arepositioned on the axis of the appropriate face (depending on type). Caps with differentp-point configurations, such as ‘flipped’ Caps (where P1 is Pleave and P2 is Parrive) orCaps used as Reducers, can result in incorrect output.

Component Description

SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Note

Cap - Butt Weld KABW 1

Cap -Compression

KACP 1

Cap - Screwed KASC 1

Cap - Socket Weld KASW

5.5

3.5

01 2

3.75

2.0

01 2

3.5

1.5

01 2

D 3 . 5

1 . 5

01 2

12.03:3


3.3 CLOS Symbol Keys

3.4 COUP Symbol Keys



Pipe BlockFixed Length

PF

Pipe Block Variable Length

PV

4.75

2.5

1 2

0

4.5

2.5

1 2

0



Nipple - Screwed NRSC

Nipple - Screwed NBSC

Coupling -Compression

COCP

Coupling - Screwed COSC

2.0

4.0

1 2

0

1.0

4.0

2.5 1 2

0

3.5

3.5

2 2

1.51 2

0

3.5

2 2

2.5

1 2

0

1 2

0

12.03:4


Note:

1. The dimensions of these components depend upon plotted leg length. The defaultplotted leg length is 9mm, but you can set this to a different value using theLEGLENGTH command. The minimum value you can set is 6mm.

3.5 CROS Symbol Keys

Coupling - SocketWeld

COSW

Butt Weld Elbolet CEBW 1

Socket Weld Elbolet CESW 1

Screwed Elbolet CESC 1



D D3.5

2 2

2.5

1 2

0

()8.0

6.5 1.5 1 2

0

()D8.0

6.5 1.5 1 2

0

()8.0

6.5 1.51 2

0

ComponentDescription


Cross - Butt Weld CRBW 2

Cross - Socket Weld CRSW 2

Cross - Compression CRCP 2

1 23

4

0

1 23

4

0

12.03:5


Notes:

1. The positions of P3 and P4 along the vertical axis are important for deriving correct cutpipe lengths. The vertical displacements of P3 and P4 are determined by the points atwhich the offline legs intersect the main line. P0, P1, P2, P3 and P4 will be coincidentwhen the offline leg has the same bore as the main line.

2. The dimensions of all Cross components depend upon plotted leg length. The defaultplotted leg length is 9mm, but you can set this to a different value using theLEGLENGTH command. The minimum value you can set is 6mm.

3. Replace the ** characters in the symbol key with one of the following end conditionidentifiers: BW for butt weldCP for compressionSW for socket weldFL for flangedSC for screwedPL for plain

4. The @ character in the symbol key is replaced automatically by an integer in the range1 to 4, depending on the relative bore size of the connections, with 1 assigned to thelargest bore. It is important to note the bore size if redefining the SKEYS for X1**, X2**,X3** or X4**.

Cross - Flanged CRFL 2

Cross - Screwed CRSC 2

Cross - Set on CRSO 1, 2

Cross - Set onReinforced

CRRF 1,2

Cross - Generic Y-type with variableangle out- and off-legs

X@** 3,4,5



1 23

4

0

1 23

4

0

)(

)(

3

4

01 2

)(

)(

REINFORCED

3

4

01 2

VARIABLEANGLE

VARIABLEANGLE

VARIABLEANGLE

1 23

4

0

12.03:6


5. Flanged connections on generic Y-type fittings are represented on the isometric on thetube only. This is due to the fact that the y-type fitting is user-definable and flangedrepresentation on the component cannot be enforced. ELBO or BEND Symbol Keys

3.6 ELBO or BEND Symbol Keys



Elbow - Butt Weld (90and 45 degree)

ELBW1,9

Elbow - Butt Weldwith a Connection (90and 45 degree)

ETBW 1,5,9

Elbow - Butt Weld180 degree Return (UElbow)

EUBW 2,9

Elbow Compression(90 and 45 degree)

ELCP 1,9

Elbow Compressionwith a Connection (90and 45 degree)

ETCP 1,5,9

Elbow - Screwed withMale Ends (90 and 45degree)

EBSC 1,9

Elbow - Screwed withFemale Ends (90 and45 degrees)

ELSC 1,9

1

2

0

1

2

3

1 2

34 5

0

1

2

0

)()(

1

2

03

1

2

0

12.03:7


Elbow - Screwed -Female with aConnection (90 and45 degree)

ETSC 1,5,9

Elbow - Socket Weld ELSW 1,9

Elbow - Socket Weldwith a Connection

ETSW 1,5,9

Elbow - Reducing ER** 1,6

Bend - Flanged (allangles)

BEFL 1,9

Bend - Flanged with aConnection (allangles)

BTFL 1,5,9

Bend - Flanged 180degree Return (UBend)

BUFL 2,9

Bend - Mitre MIFL 1,9

Flanged Bend - Mitrewith a ConnectionFlanged

MTFL 1,5,9



)(

)( 1

2

03

1

2

0

)(

)( 1

2

03

)( 1

2

0

1

2

0

)(

)(

1

2

03

1 2

34 5

0

1

2

0

1

2

03

12.03:8


Bend - Mitre MIBW 1,7,9

Bend - Mitre MIPL 1,8,9

Butt Weld Bend -Mitre with aConnection

MTBW 1,5,9

Butt Weld Bend -Mitre with aConnection

MTPL 1,5,9

Bend - Lobster BackFlanged

L@FL 1,3,9

Bend - Lobster Backwith a ConnectionFlanged

T@FL 1,3,5,9

Bend - Lobster BackButt Weld

L@BW 1,3,9

Lobster Back Bend L@PL 1,3,8,9

Bend - Lobster Backwith a Connection

T@BW 1,3,5,9



1

2

0

1

2

0

1

2

0 3

1

2

0 3

1

2

0

1

2

03

1

2

0

1

2

0

1

2

0 3

12.03:9


Notes:

1. Generic types ELBO and BEND have a connection reference to facilitate connectionsto the elbow or bend. ISODRAFT will always treat an elbow or bend as having anoffline leg if it has a P3 with a bore greater than zero. Care is needed when selecting asymbol key and point set in order to achieve the required results.

2. To use this symbol, the p-points must be arranged as shown in the following diagramand P3 should not have its bore set.

3. Replace the @ character in the symbol key with an integer (1 to 9) denoting the numberof segments.

4. Replace the + character in the symbol key with an integer (1 to 9) denoting the ratio ofthe bend radius to the pipe bore.

5. The p-point for the offline connection (P3) can be positioned anywhere along thehorizontal (P1) axis that suits your specific component design.

6. Reducing elbows can have any of the end types BW, CP, FL, SC, or SW, but not PL.7. This type of component is treated as a fitting in the material list.8. This type of component is treated as tube in the material list.

Bend - Lobster Backwith a Connection

T@PL 1,3,5,9

Bend - Pulled (AllAngles)

PB+D 1,4,9

Bend - Pulled 180degree Return (UBend)

BU+D 2,4,9

Bend - Pulled with aConnection (AllAngles)

TB+D 1,4,5,9



1

2

0 3

1

2

0

1 2

34 5

0

1

2

0 3

0

2

1

3

5

4

12.03:10


9. The dimensions of all Elbow and Bend components depend upon plotted leg length.The default plotted leg length is 9mm, but you can set this to a different value using theLEGLENGTH command. The minimum value you can set is 6mm.

3.7 FBLI Symbol Keys

Notes:

1. Reducing flanges will have clarifying text plotted on the isometric drawing to highlighttheir presence.

2. P3 is used only for orientation and will have its bore unset.

3.8 FILT Symbol Keys



Flange - Blind FLBL

Flange - ReducingConcentric

FLRC 1

Flange - ReducingEccentric

FLRE 1,2

4.5

2.5

01 2

)(4.5

1.0

1 2

0

)(4.5

1.0

23

01



Filter/Strainer -Straight Through

FI** 1

Filter/Strainer - Angle FA** 1,2

4.5

8.01 2

0

4.5

8.0

9.0

9.012

0

12.03:11


Notes:


2. To use this symbol, the p-points must be arranged as shown in the following diagram:


Note: That the horizontal offset may be zero; i.e. P0, P1, P2 and P3 may be coplanar.

Filter/Strainer - Offset FO** 1,3,5

Filter/Strainer -Return

FR** 1,4

'Y'-type Filter/Strainer

FY** 1



8.0

6.06.0 1

23

4.5

8.01

23

P2

P1

P0

P1

P2

P0

P3

End

P1P0

P2P3

Side

Plan

P1

P2

P0

P3

P1 P0

P3 P2

12.03:12



Note: That P3 is used only for orientation purposes and will have its bore unset. Thehorizontal offset may be zero; i.e. P0 and P1(and similarly P2 and P3) may becoincident.

5. Generic type FILT has a connection reference to facilitate connections to reducers.If the connection facility is not being used, then an eccentric reducer will have a p-arrive, a p-leave, and a P3 to orientate the flat side.If the connection facility is to be used, P3 will be the connection p-point and as suchmust have valid bore and orientation data for the connection. As the flat side can beeither in the same direction as the connection or directly opposite, a P9 p-point must beused to give the orientation of the flat side.

3.9 FLAN Symbol Keys

P2 P3

P0 P1



Flange - Blind FLBL

Flange -Flared/LooseBacking

FLFL 1

Flange - Backing FLLB 2

Flange - ReducingConcentric

FLRC 3

5.0

1.0

01 2

() 5.0

1.0

3.5

01 2

() 5.0

1.0

3.501 2

()5.0

1.0

1 2

0

12.03:13


Flange - ReducingEccentric

FLRE 3

Flange - Screwed FLSC

Flange - Slip On FLSO

Flange - Slip On with‘J’ Type Weld

FLSJ 1

Flange - Orifice SlipOn

FOSO 4

Flange - Socket Weld FLSW



()5.0

1.0

1 2

0

3

()5.0

1.0

3.5

2.0

1 2

0

()5.0

1.0

1 2

0

()5.5

1.0

1 2

0

()5.5

1.0

1 20

3

()5.5

1.0

3.5

2.0

1 2

0

12.03:14


Notes:

1. To allow for the amount of pipe that normally passes through the component beforecutting or grinding off, a cutting allowance is included if the LOOSE attribute of theflange is set to TRUE. This allowance is determined by the value of the ALLO attribute,if set. If the ALLO attribute is not set (or set to zero), the allowance will default to150mm. However, this default value can be altered by theLOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE command.

2. The system used by previous version of the software (using ‘intuitive’ P3 points) is stillsupported.

3. To be used in conjunction with LJSE symbols FLRG or FLSE.4. Reducing flanges will have clarifying text plotted on the isometric drawing to highlight

their presence.5. Orifice flanges will have clarifying text plotted on the isometric drawing to highlight their

presence.

3.10 FTUB Symbol Keys

Flange - Weld Neck FLWN

Flange - Orifice WeldNeck

FOWN 4



()5.5

4.01 2

0

()5.5

3.01.0 1 20

3



Fixed Length Pipe -With flanged ends

FPFL 1

Fixed Length Pipe -Without flanged ends

FPPL

Fixed Length Pipe - tobe displayed andstretched, like impliedtube on an isometric

TUBE

1 2

0

2.0

4.0

1 2

0

1 2

0

12.03:15


Notes:

1. The dimensions of all piping components depend upon plotted leg length. The defaultplotted leg length is 9mm, but you can set this to a different value using theLEGLENGTH command. The minimum value you can set is 6mm.

3.11 INST Symbol Keys



Instrument II** 1,5

Instrument - Angle IA** 1,2,5

Instrument - Offset IO** 1,3

Instrument - Return IR** 1,4

Instrument - Dial IDPL 6

Instrument - DialFlanged

IDFL 6

Orifice Plate OP

4.5

8.01 2

0

4.0

4.0

9.0

9.0 1

20

4.5

8.0

1

23

0

4.5

8.0

1

23

0

3.0

6.5 DIA

01

23

3.0

6.5 DIA

0.25

01

23

3.0

3.0

5.5 1 2

0

12.03:16


Restrictor Plate RP

Rupture Disk DR

Valve - Angle Relief/Vent

RA** 1,5

Valve - Angle PressureReducing

XA** 1,5

Valve Control CV** 1,5

Valve - Angle Control CA** 1,5

Valve - 3 Way Control C3** 1,5

Valve - 4 Way Control C4** 1,5

Valve - Control SquareIndicator

SV** 1,5

Valve - Angle ControlSquare Indicator

SA** 1,3



1.0

3.0

5.5 1 2

0

2.5

3.5

4.5

2.0 1 2

0

4.0

4.75

8.0

4.5

2.5

21

30

4.0

4.75

8.0

4.5

2.5

21

30

4.0

6.5

4.0

2.01.5

1 20 3

4.0

4.75

4.0

2.52.0

3.25

21

30

4.0

4.75

4.0

2.251.75

4.759.25 1 2

0 4

3

4.75

8.0

9.25

4.0

1 20

453

4.0

14.0

4.5

3.52.0

31 20

4.08.0

4.5

2.0

23

10

12.03:17


Valve - 3 Way ControlSquare Indicator

S3** 1,5

Valve - 4 Way ControlSquare Indicator

S4** 1,5

Valve - ControlMotorised Indicator

MV** 1,5

Valve - Angle ControlMotorised Indicator

MA** 1,5

Valve - 3 Way ControlMotorised Indicator

M3** 1,5

Valve - 4 Way ControlMotorised Indicator

M4** 1,5

Valve - Control HandIndicator

HV** 1,5

Valve - Angle ControlHand Indicator

HA** 1,5

Valve - 3Way ControlHand Indicator

H3** 1,5



4.0

4.75

4.5

3.752.0

1 204

3

4.08.0

9.25

4.75 1 204

3

4.0

6.5

4.0

2.5

1 20 3

4.0

6.5

4.02.5

4.5

8.02

10 3

4.0

9.25

4.02.5

4.75

8.01 2

04

3

4.08.0

4.75

9.25

1 20

4

3

4.0

6.5

4.0

3.02.0

1 20 3

4.0

9.25

4.0

3.02.0

4.75

8.02

1 03

4.0

9.25

4.0

3.252.75

4.75

8.01 2

04

3

12.03:18


Notes:

1. Replace the ** characters in the symbol key with one of the following end conditionidentifiers:BW for butt weld CP for compression SW for socket weld FL for flanged SC for screwedPL for plain



Valve - 4Way ControlHand Indicator

H4** 1,5

Valve - PressureReducing

XV** 1,5

Valve - Relief/Vent RV** 1,5



4.08.0

4.75

9.25

1 203

4

4.0

5.75

2.5

3.5

4.0

3.0

1 20 3

4.0

9.25

4.0

3.5

1 20 3

P2

P1

P0

12.03:19




Note: That the horizontal offset may be zero; i.e. P0 and P1 (and similarly P2 and P3) maybe coincident.

5. If an orientation p-point (P3) is present in the point set and is oriented away from theXYZ axes, then the orientation of this p-point will be shown on the isometric.

6. Instrument dials can have a P3 with an unset bore for orienting the dial. This p-point willnormally be positioned perpendicular to the dial face, on the dial axis. A message willbe output near the component showing the orientation of P3.

P1

P2

P0

P3

End

P1P0

P2P3

Side

Plan

P1

P2

P0

P3

P1 P0

P3 P2

P2 P3

P0 P1

12.03:20


3.12 LJSE Symbol Keys

Note:

1. To be used in conjunction with FLAN symbol FLLB.

3.13 PCOM Symbol Keys



Lap Joint Ring Loose FLRG 1

Lap Joint Stub EndLoose

FLSE 1

()

5.0

1.0

2.5

1 0 2

() 5.5

1.0

2.5

01 2



Block - Angle BA** 1,2

Block - Offset BO** 1,3

Block - Return BR** 1,4

Expansion Bellows EX** 1

4.5

9.0

9.0

4.5

1

20

5.5

8.0

8.0 6.0 1

23

0

21.5

5.5

26 2

1

3

0

5.6

3.40.7 1 20

12.03:21


Flame Trap FT** 1

Block - Angle BA** 1,2

Flexible Hose FX** 1

Hose Coupling CH** 1

Non-category Item NC** 1

Plug PL

Restrictor Plate RP

Sight Glass SG** 1,5



5.0

5.5 1 20

4.5

9.0

9.0

4.5

1

20

2.5

5.5 1 20

2.5

4.5 1 20

2.5

4.5 1 20

2.5

2.0 1.5

3.0

01 2

5.5

3.0

1.0

1 20

5.5

5.5

4.4

1 20

12.03:22


Notes:



Slip Plate SP 5,6

Slip Ring SR 5,6

Spectacle Blind SB 5,6

Tundish (Funnel) TU** 1



7.0

2.25

2.25

1.25

01 2

3

7.0

2.25

2.25

1.25

01 2

3

6.0

2.25

4.50

1.25

01 2

3

8.03.0

5.0

4.0

1

2

0

12.03:23






P2

P1

P0

P1

P2

P0

P3

End

P1P0

P2P3

Side

Plan

P1

P2

P0

P3

P1 P0

P3 P2

P2 P3

P0 P1

12.03:24


5. If an orientation p-point is present in the point set, the orientation of this p-point will beshown on the isometric.

6. The p-point set shown represents a typical arrangement for positioning and orientingthe component, but is not mandatory.

3.14 REDU Symbol Keys

3.14.1 Concentric Reducers



Reducer - ConcentricButt Weld

RCBW 1

Reducer - ConcentricFabricated from Plate

CPBW 1

Reducer - ConcentricSwaged from Pipe

CSBW 1

Reducer - Concentricwith a Connection ButtWeld

CTBW 1

Reducer - Concentricwith a ConnectionFabricated from Plate

CZBW 1

Reducer - Concentricwith a ConnectionSwaged from Pipe

CXBW 1

)()(3.5

5.5

0.75

1 20

)()(3.5

6.5

1.0

1 20

)()(3.5

6.5

1.0

1 20

)()(3.5

6.5

1.01 20

3

)()(3.5

6.5

1.01 20

3

)()(3.5

6.5

1.01 20

3

12.03:25


Reducer - ConcentricCompression

RCCP 1

Reducer - ConcentricFlanged

RCFL 1

Reducer - ConcentricFabricated from PlateFlanged

CPFL 1

Reducer - ConcentricSwaged from PipeFlanged

CSFL 1

Reducer - Concentricwith a ConnectionFlanged

CTFL 1

Reducer - Concentricwith a ConnectionFabricated from PlateFlanged

CZFL 1

Reducer - Concentricwith a ConnectionSwaged from PipeFlanged

CXFL 1

Reducer - ConcentricNipple

RNSC 1



4.0

5.5

3.01 20

4.5

5.5

3.51 20

4.5

5.5

3.51 20

4.5

5.5

3.51 20

4.5

5.5

3.5 1 20

3

4.5

5.5

3.5 1 20

3

4.5

5.5

3.5 1 20

3

1.0

6.5

3.5 1 20

12.03:26


Note:

1. A concentric reducer with a connection point will have an additional p-point, P3, with avalid bore. A concentric reducer without a connection will have only a p-arrive and p-leave, as shown.



Reducer - ConcentricScrewed

RCSC 1

Reducer - Concentricwith a ScrewedConnection

CTSC 1

Reducer - ConcentricSocket Weld

RCSW 1

Reducer - Concentricwith a ConnectionSocket Weld

CTSW 1

Reducer - ConcentricSocket Weld Bush

RBSW 1

Special ReducingFlange

RF 1

1.0

5.5

3.51 20

1.0

6.5

3.5

1 20

3

1.0

6.5

3.51 20

1.0

6.5

3.5

1 20

3

1.0

6.5

3.5 1 20

1.0

3.25

4.75 1 20

12.03:27


3.14.2 Eccentric Reducers



Reducer - EccentricButt Weld

REBW 1,2

Reducer - EccentricFabricated from Plate

EPBW 1,2

Reducer - EccentricSwaged from Pipe

ESBW 1

Reducer - Eccentricwith a Connection ButtWeld

OTBW 1,2

Reducer - Eccentricwith a ConnectionFabricated from Plate

EZBW 1,2

Reducer - Eccentricwith a ConnectionSwaged from Pipe

EXBW 1,2

Reducer - EccentricScrewed

RESC 1

()(

)2.0

5.5

5.5

1 20

()(

)2.0

5.5

5.5

1 20

()(

)2.0

5.5

5.5

1 20

2.0

6.5

5.5

1 20

3

9

2.0

6.5

5.5

1 20

3

9

2.0

6.5

5.5

1 20

3

9

2.0

6.5

5.5 1 20 3

12.03:28


Notes:

1. Generic type REDU has a connection reference to facilitate connections to reducers. Ifthe connection facility is not being used, then an eccentric reducer will have a p-arrive,a p-leave, and a P3 to orientate the flat side. If the connection facility is to be used, P3will be the connection p-point and as such must have valid bore and orientation data forthe connection. As the flat side can be either in the same direction as the connection ordirectly opposite, a P9 p-point must be used to give the orientation of the flat side.

2. If an orientation p-point is present in the point set, the orientation of this p-point will beshown on the isometric.

Reducer - Eccentricwith a ConnectionScrewed

OTSC1,2

Reducer - EccentricFlanged

REFL 1,2

Reducer - EccentricFabricated from PlateFlanged

EPFL 1,2

Reducer - EccentricSwaged from PipeFlanged

ESFL 1,2

Reducer - Eccentricwith a ConnectionFlanged

OTFL 1,2

Reducer - Eccentricwith a ConnectionFabricated from PlateFlanged

EZFL 1,2

Reducer - Eccentricwith a ConnectionSwaged from PipeFlanged

EXFL 1,2



()(

)2.0

5.5

5.5

1 20

3

9

1.5

5.6

4.8 1 20 3

1.5

5.6

4.8 1 20 3

1.5

5.6

4.8 1 20 3

1.5

5.6

4.8

1 20

3

9

1.5

5.6

4.8

1 20

3

9

1.5

5.6

4.8

1 20

3

9

12.03:29


3.15 SHU Symbol Keys

Notes:


2. SHU elements have a CRFA attribute allowing up to 10 connection points.

3.16 TEE or OLET Symbol Keys



Non-Category Item NC**

1,26.5

4.5 1 20



Olet - Half Couplinge.g. Screwed (Pictureshows screwed but canbe any connectiontype)

HC** 7

Olet - Half Couplinge.g. Socket Weld

HC** 7

Olet - Latrolet e.g. ButtWeld

LA**

)( )(3.0

3.0

01 2

3

)()(

3.0

3.0

01 2

3

)( )(

3.2

4.8

01 2

3

12.03:30


Olet - Latrolete.g. Screwed

LA**

Olet - Latrolete.g. Socket Weld

LA**

Olet - Nipolete.g. Screwed

NI**

Olet - Nipolet e.g. PlainEnded

NI**

Olet - Sockolet SK**

Olet - Sweepolet SW**

Olet - Thredolet TH**



)( )(

3.2

4.8

01 2

3

)( )(

3.2

4.8

01 2

3

)()(

1.0

5.0

3.5

01 2

3

)()(

1.0

5.0

4.0

01 2

3

)()(

5.5

4.0

01 2

3

)()(

5.5

4.0

01 2

3

)()(

5.5

4.0

3.5

01 2

3

12.03:31


Olet - Weldolet WT**

Olet - InstrumentFlanged

ITFL

Tee - Butt Weld TEBW 2,3,7

Tee - Compression TECP 2,3

Tee - Flanged TEFL 2,3

Tee - Screwed TESC 2,3

Tee - Set-on TESO 1,2,7

Tee - Set-onReinforced

TERF 1,2,7



)()(

5.5

4.0

3.5

01 2

3

5.0

8.0

5.5

1 20

3

)()(

VARIABLEANGLE

1 20

3

)()(

VARIABLEANGLE

1 20

3

VARIABLEANGLE

1 20

3

)()(

VARIABLEANGLE

1 20

3

)()(

VARIABLEANGLE

01 2

3

)()(

REINFORCED

VARIABLEANGLE

01 2

3

12.03:32


Notes:

1. The position of P3 along the perpendicular axis is important for deriving the cut pipelength. The perpendicular displacement of P3 is determined by the point at which theoffline leg intersects the main line. For TESO and TERF, the distance P0 to P3 must notexceed half the main bore; P0, P1, P2 and P3 will be coincident when the offline leghas the same bore as the main line. For TPUL, the distance P0 to P3 must exceed halfthe main bore. If the position of P3 does not follow these rules, any weld shown at theintersection may appear in the wrong place.

2. The dimensions of piping components depend upon plotted leg length. The defaultplotted leg length is 9mm, but you can set this to a different value using theLEGLENGTH command. The minimum value you can set is 6mm.

3. The TEBW, TECP, TEFL, TESC and TESW SKEYs can be used for laterals.

Tee - Pulled TPUL 1,2,7

Tee - Socket Weld TESW 2,3,7

Tee - Swept BranchButt Weld

TSBW 2,7

Tee - Swept BranchFlanged

TSFL 2,7

Tee - Swept BranchCompression

TSCP 2,7

Tee - Swept BranchSocket Weld

TSSW 2,7

Tee - Generic Y-typewith variable angle out-and off- legs

Y@** 4,5,6,7



)()(

VARIABLEANGLE

01 2

3

)()(

VARIABLEANGLE

1 20

3

)()( 1 20

3

1 20

3

)()( 1 20

3

)()( 1 20

3

VARIABLEANGLE

VARIABLEANGLE

1 20

3

12.03:33



5. The @ character in the symbol key is replaced automatically by an integer in the range1 to 3, depending on the relative bore size of the connections, with 1 assigned to thelargest bore. It is important to note the bore size if redefining the SKEYS for Y1**, Y2**or Y3**.

6. Flanged connections on generic Y-type fittings are represented on the isometric on thetube only. This is due to the fact that the y-type fitting is user-definable and flangedrepresentation on the component cannot be enforced.

7. The presence of an offset P3 may be indicated. The P3 connection of the tee/olet mustbe connected directly to a tube. The default behaviour is that, if an offset P3configuration is present, a new ATEXT characterising the offset is output upon thedrawing. This new ATEXT is number 233 in the list of ATEXTs and its default value is‘BRANCH OFFSET BY’ followed by the nonzero relative coordinates of the offset.

3.17 TRAP Symbol Keys

Notes:

1. Replace the ** characters in the symbol key with one of the following end conditionidentifiers:



Trap - In Line (StraightThrough)

TI** 2

Trap - Angle TA** 1,2

Trap - Offset TO** 1,3

Trap - Return TR** 1,4

8.0

4.5

1 20

9.25

4.0 8.0

4.5

12

0

8.0

8.06.0

12

0

3

5.0

26.021.5

1

23

0

12.03:34


BW for butt weld CP for compression SW for socket weld FL for flanged SC for screwedPL for plain



P3 must not have a valid bore. It is used only to obtain correct orientation of theelement.P3 can be orientated in PARAGON.



P2

P1

P0

P1

P2

P0

P3

End

P1P0

P2P3

Side

Plan

P1

P2

P0

P3

P1 P0

P3 P2

12.03:35



3.18 UNIO Symbol Keys

3.19 UNIVERSAL Symbol Key

Notes:

1. Radius of circle is controlled by percentage scale factor attribute, SkeyScale, on SDTEelement (100% = 10mm). Symbol also has a line from circumference to eachconnection point.

2. UNIV Skey implies no end connection information. To flag end connections, the PSkeyon each p-point must be set to one of the following end condition identifiers:

P2 P3

P0 P1



Union - Screwed UNSC

Union - Socket Weld UNSW

Union - Butt Weld UNBW

5.5

2.5

1 20

5.5

2.5

1 20

5.5

2.5

1 20



Universal key forgeneric type PCOM

UNIV 1,210 mm

12.03:36


BW for butt weld CP for compression SW for socket weld FL for flanged SC for screwedPL for plain (default if unset)

3.20 VALV Symbol Keys



Valve - Angle AV** 1,2

Valve - Angle PressureReducing

AX** 1,2

Valve - Angle Relief/Vent

AR** 1,2

Valve - Ball VB** 1,2

Valve - Basic VV** 1,2

Valve - Butterfly VY** 1,2

Valve - Check VC** 1,2

4.0

4.75

9.25

8.0 1

2

0 3

4.0

4.75

9.25

8.0 1

2

0 3

4.0

4.75

9.25

8.01

2

0 3

3.0

4.0

9.25

1 20 3

4.0

9.25

1 20 3

4.0

9.25

1 20 3

4.0

9.25

1 20

12.03:37


Valve - Check CK** 1,2

Valve - Cock VK** 1,2

Valve - Diaphragm VD** 1,2

Valve - Gate VT** 1,2

Valve - Globe VG** 1,2

Valve - Needle VN** 1,2

Valve - Plug VP** 1,2

Valve - PressureReducing

VX** 1,2



4.0

9.0

1 20

4.0

9.25

1 20 3

4.0

9.25

1 20 3

4.0

9.25

1 20 3

4.0

9.25

1 20 3

4.0

9.25

1 20 3

4.0

9.25

1 20 3

4.0

9.25

2.5

1 20 3

12.03:38


Notes:

1. Replace the ** characters in the symbol key with one of the following end conditionidentifiers: BW for butt weld CP for compression SW for socket weld FL for flanged SC for screwedPL for plain

2. If an orientation p-point is present in the point set, then ISODRAFT will output theorientation of this p-point unless it is oriented in a primary direction (X, Y, Z etc.)

3.21 VENT Symbol Keys

3.22 VFWA Symbol Keys

Valve - Relief/Vent VR** 1,2

Valve - Slide VS** 1,2



4.0

9.25

1 20 3

4.0

9.25

1 20 3



Rupture Disk RD2.5

7.75

1 20



Valve - 4 Way V4** 1,24.0

9.25

8.0

4.5 0

3

1 254

12.03:39


Notes:


2. If an orientation p-point (P5) is present in the point set, the orientation of that p-point willbe shown on the isometric.

3.23 VTWA Symbol Keys

Notes:


2. If an orientation p-point (P5) is present in the point set, the orientation of that p-point willbe shown on the isometric.



Valve - 3 Way V3** 1,24.0

4.5

8.0

9.25

0

31 2

4

12.03:40


3.24 WELD Symbol Keys

3.25 Floor Penetration ATTA Symbol

Notes:

1. Same rules apply as those used for positioning the FLOW ARROW symbol (see In-lineComponents, Including Straight-through Valves in the ISODRAFT User Guide).

2. Must only be positioned in vertical sections of pipeline.3. ISODRAFT will automatically orientate the fitting shape to suit the up/down direction of

the pipeline.



Weld - Site WS

Weld - Field Fitted WF

Weld - Shop WW

4.0

4.0

01 2

FFW

4.0

4.0

01 2

01 2


SKEY Plotted Symbol Note

Pipe passing throughfloor

FLOR 1,2,3

12.03:41


3.26 Welded Lug Symbol Keys

3.27 Symbol Key Reference IndexThis section lists all available symbol keys (SKEYs) in alphabetic order. Cross-referencesare given to the generic component types (GTYPEs) under which you will find themdescribed in the preceding sections of this appendix (if appropriate).

Each SKEY has an indication of whether or not it may be redefined, as explained in theISODRAFT User Guide, Section 11.1, The Basic Principles. For components which includespindles, the standard spindle type associated with the predefined SKEY is indicated, seethe ISODRAFT User Guide Section 11.3, Special Keys, for illustrations of these spindletypes.



Welded Circular Lug WLC

Welded RectangularLug

WLR

)()(

1.0

5.0

4.0

01 2

3

)()(

1.0

5.0

4.0

01 2

3

SKEY GTYPE COMPONENT USER DEFINABLE?

SPINDLE TYPE

AR** VALV Angled Pressure Reducing Valve Yes 09SP

AV** VALV Angled Valve Yes 01SP

AX** VALV Angled Relief Valve or Vent Yes 02SP

BA** PCOM Angle Block No

BEFL BEND Flanged Bend No

BO** PCOM Offset Block Yes

BR** PCOM Return Block No

BTFL BEND Flanged Bend with Tee No

BU+D BEND Pulled Return Bend No

BUFL BEND Flanged Return Bend No

C3** INST 3-Way Control Valve No 13SP

C4** INST 4-Way Control Valve No 13SP

12.03:42


CA** INST Angled Control Valve Yes 13SP

CEBW COUP Butt Weld Elbolet Yes

CESC COUP Screwed Fitting Elbolet Yes

CESW COUP Socket Weld Elbolet Yes

CH** PCOM Hose Coupling Yes

CK** VALV Check Valve Yes

COCP COUP Compression Fitting Coupling Yes

COSC COUP Screwed Fitting Coupling Yes

COSW COUP Socket Weld Coupling Yes

CPBW REDU Butt Weld Concentric Reducer Yes

CPFL REDU Flanged Concentric Reducer Yes

CRBW CROS Butt Weld Cross No

CRCP CROS Compression Fitting Cross No

CRFL CROS Flanged Cross No

CRRF CROS Set On Reinforced Cross No

CRSC CROS Screwed Fitting Cross No

CRSO CROS Set On Cross No

CRSW CROS Socket Weld Cross No

CSBW REDU Butt Weld Concentric Reducer Yes

CSFL REDU Flanged Concentric Reducer Yes

CTBW REDU Butt Weld Concentric Reducerwith Tee

Yes

CTFL REDU Flanged Concentric Reducer withTee

Yes

CTSC REDU Screwed Fitting Concentric withTee

Yes

CTSW REDU Socket Weld Concentric Reducerwith Tee

Yes

CV** INST Control Valve Yes 13SP

CXBW REDU Butt Weld Concentric Reducerwith Tee

Yes

CXFL REDU Flanged Concentric Reducer withTee

Yes


SPINDLE TYPE

12.03:43


CZBW REDU Butt Weld Concentric Reducerwith Tee

Yes

CZFL REDU Flanged Concentric Reducer withTee

Yes

DR INST Rupture Disc Yes

EBSC ELBO Screwed Fitting (Male) Elbow No

ELBW ELBO Butt Weld Elbow No

ELCP ELBO Compression Fitting Elbow No

ELSC ELBO Screwed Fitting Elbow No

ELSW ELBO Socket Weld Elbow No

EPBW REDU Butt Weld Eccentric Reducer Yes

EPFL REDU Flanged Eccentric Reducer Yes

ER** ELBO Reducing Elbow No

ESBW REDU Butt Weld Eccentric Reducer Yes

ESFL REDU Flanged Eccentric Reducer Yes

ETBW ELBO Butt Weld Elbow with Tee No

ETCP ELBO Compression Fitting Elbow withTee

No

ETSC ELBO Screwed Fitting Elbow with Tee No

ETSW ELBO Socket Weld Elbow with Tee No

EUBW ELBO Butt Weld Return Elbow No

EX** PCOM Expansion Bellows Yes

EXBW REDU Butt Weld Eccentric Reducer withTee

Yes

EXFL REDU Flanged Eccentric Reducer withTee

Yes

EZBW REDU Butt Weld Eccentric Reducer withTee

Yes

EZFL REDU Flanged Eccentric Reducer withTee

Yes

FA** FILT Angled Filter No

FI** FILT Straight-Through (In-Line) Filter Yes

FLBL FLAN Blind or Blanking Flange Yes

FLBL FBLI Blind or Blanking Flange Yes


SPINDLE TYPE

12.03:44


FLFL FLAN Flared Flange Yes

FLLB FLAN Loose Backing Flange Yes

FLOW Flow Arrow Yes

FLRC FLAN Reducing Flange Yes

FLRC FBLI Reducing Flange Yes

FLRE FLAN Eccentric Reducing Flange Yes

FLRE FBLI Eccentric Reducing Flange Yes

FLRG LJSE Lap Joint Ring No

FLOR ATTA Floor Penetration Type ATTA Yes

FLSC FLAN Screwed Fitting Flange Yes

FLSE LJSE Lap Joint Stub End No

FLSJ FLAN Slip-on J-Type Welded Flange Yes

FLSW FLAN Socket Weld Flange Yes

FLSO FLAN Slip-on Flange Yes

FLWN FLAN Weld Neck Flange Yes

FO** FILT Offset Filter Yes

FY** FILT ‘Y’-type Filter/Strainer Yes

FOSO FLAN Slip-on Flange with Orifice Yes

FOWN FLAN Weld Neck Flange with Orifice Yes

FPFL FTUB Fixed Length Pipe with FlangedEnds

No

FPPL FTUB Fixed Length Pipe with Plain Ends Yes

FR** FILT Return Filter No

FT** PCOM Flame Trap Yes

FX** PCOM Flexible Hose Yes

H3** INST 3-Way Control Valve No 12SP

H4** INST 4-Way Control Valve No 12SP

HA** INST Angled Control Valve Yes 12SP

HC** OLET Screwed Half Coupling Yes

HC** OLET Socket Weld Half Coupling Yes

HV** INST Control Valve Yes 12SP

IA** INST Angled Instrument Yes


SPINDLE TYPE

12.03:45


IDFL INST Flanged Instrument with Dial No

IDPL INST Instrument with Dial No

II** INST Instrument Yes

IO** INST Offset Instrument Yes

IR** INST Return Instrument No

ITFL OLET Flanged Instrument Tee No

KABW CAP Butt Weld Cap Yes

KACP CAP Compression Fitting Cap Yes

KASC CAP Screwed Fitting Cap Yes

KASW CAP Socket Weld Cap Yes

L@BW BEND Butt Weld Lobster Back Bend No

L@FL BEND Flanged Lobster Back Bend No

LA** OLET Butt Weld Latrolet Yes

LA** OLET Screwed Fitting Latrolet Yes

LA** OLET Socket Weld Latrolet Yes

M3** INST 3-Way Motorised Valve No 11SP

M4** INST 4-Way Motorised Valve No

MA** INST Angled Control Valve Yes 11SP

MIBW BEND Butt Weld Mitred Bend No

MIFL BEND Flanged Mitred Bend No

MTBW BEND Butt Weld Mitred Bend with Tee No

MTFL BEND Flanged Mitred Bend with Tee No

MV** INST Motorised Valve Yes 11SP

NBSC COUP Screwed Nipple Yes

NC** PCOM Non-Category Item Yes

NC** SHU Non-Category Item Yes

NI** OLET Plain End Nipolet Yes

NI** OLET Screwed Fitting Nipolet Yes

NRSC COUP Screwed Fitting Nipple Yes

OP INST Orifice Plate Yes

OTBW REDU Butt Weld Eccentric Reducer withTee

Yes


SPINDLE TYPE

12.03:46


OTFL REDU Flanged Eccentric Reducer withTee

Yes

OTSC REDU Screwed Fitting Eccentric Reducerwith Tee

Yes

PB+D BEND Pulled Bend No

PF CLOS Fixed Length Pipe Block Yes

PL PCOM Plug Yes

PV CLOS Variable Length Pipe Block Yes

PR INST Restrictor Plate Yes

RA** INST Angled Relief Valve Yes 02SP

RBSC REDU Screwed Fitting ConcentricReducing Bush

Yes

RBSW REDU Socket Weld Concentric ReducingBush

Yes

RCBW REDU Butt Weld Concentric Reducer Yes

RCCP REDU Compression Fitting ConcentricReducer

Yes

RCFL REDU Flanged Concentric Reducer Yes

RCSC REDU Screwed Fitting ConcentricReducer

Yes

RCSW REDU Socket Weld Concentric Reducer Yes

RD VENT Rupture Disc Yes

REBW REDU Butt Weld Eccentric Reducer Yes

REFL REDU Flanged Eccentric Reducer Yes

RESC REDU Screwed Fitting Eccentric Reducer Yes

RF REDU Special Reducing Flange Yes

RNSC REDU Nipple Fitting Concentric Reducer Yes

RP PCOM Restrictor Plate Yes

RV** INST Relief Valve Yes

S3** INST 3-Way Control Valve with SquareIndicator

No 10SP

S4** INST 4-Way Control Valve with SquareIndicator

No 10SP

SA** INST Angled Control Valve with SquareIndicator

Yes 10SP


SPINDLE TYPE

12.03:47


SB PCOM Spectacle Blind Yes

SG** PCOM Sight Glass Yes

SK** OLET Socket Weld Sockolet Yes

SP PCOM Slip Plate Yes

SR PCOM Slip Ring Yes

SV** INST Control Valve with SquareIndicator

Yes 10SP

SW** OLET Butt Weld Sweepolet Yes

T@BW BEND Butt Weld Lobster Back Bend withTee

No

T@FL BEND Flanged Lobster Back Bend withTee

No

TA** TRAP Angled Trap No

TB+D BEND Pulled Bend with Tee No

TEBW TEE Butt Weld Tee No

TECP TEE Compression Fitting Tee No

TEFL TEE Flanged Tee No

TESC TEE Screwed Fitting Tee No

TESO TEE Set On Tee No

TERF TEE Reinforced Tee No

TESW TEE Socket Weld Tee No

TH** OLET Screwed Fitting Thredolet Yes

TI** TRAP In-line Trap Yes

TO** TRAP Offset Trap Yes

TR** TRAP Return Trap No

TPUL TEE Pulled Tee No

TSBW TEE Butt Weld Swept Tee No

TSCP TEE Compression Fitting Swept Tee No

TSFL TEE Flanged Swept Tee No

TSSW TEE Socket Weld Swept Tee No

TU** PCOM Tundish or Funnel Yes

UNSC UNIO Screwed Fitting Union Yes

UNSW UNIO Socket Weld Union Yes


SPINDLE TYPE

12.03:48


UNBW UNIO Butt Weld Union Yes

UNIV PCOM Universal Skey for special fittings SeeAVEVA PDMSISODRAFTUser Guide

V3** VTWA 3-Way Valve No 01SP

V4** VFWA 4-Way Valve No 01SP

VB** VALV Ball Valve Yes 03SP

VC** VALV Check Valve Yes

VD** VALV Diaphragm Valve Yes 01SP

VG** VALV Globe Valve Yes 01SP

VK** VALV Cock Valve Yes 03SP

VN** VALV Needle Valve Yes 06SP

VP** VALV Plug Valve Yes 07SP

VR** VALV Relief Valve Yes 02SP

VS** VALV Slide Valve Yes 08SP

VT** VALV Gate Valve Yes 05SP

VV** VALV Basic Valve Yes 01SP

VX** VALV Pressure Reducing Valve Yes 09SP

VY** VALV Butterfly Valve Yes 03SP

WF WELD Field Fitted Weld No

WS WELD Site Weld No

WTBW OLET Butt Weld Weldolet Yes

WW WELD Shop Weld No

XA** INST Angled Pressure Reducing Valve Yes 09SP

XV** INST Pressure Reducing Valve Yes 09SP

X@** CROS Generic Y-type Cross with user-definable out- and off- legs

Yes

Y@** TEE Generic Y-type Tee with user-definable out- and off- legs

Yes

01HG Hanger (As a basis for user-defined hangers; see ISODRAFTUser Guide, Section 10.4, Defininga New Hanger)

Yes


SPINDLE TYPE

12.03:49


Note: ** denotes any of the following connection types:

BW Butt Weld

CP Compression Fitting

FL Flange

SC Screwed Fitting

SW Socket Weld

PL Plain

@ in Bends, denotes the number of bend segments (range 1-9)

in X-type and Y-type Crosses/Tees, replaced by an integer in the range 1 to 4, 1 indicating the largest bore, 4 indicating the smallest bore.

+ denotes the ratio of the bend radius to the pipe bore (range 1-9)

12.03:50

ISODRAFT Reference ManualAlternative Texts

4 Alternative Texts

4.1 IntroductionYou can change or remove all the text on isometric drawings using the ATEXT command.

This appendix lists the default settings of the text phrases, with their reference numbers.

The alternative texts (Atexts) have been broken down under the following headings:• Isometric Drawing Area• Title Block Area• Plotted Material List• Line Summary Area• Printed Material List• Weld Box Summary• Bend Table• Dynamic Detail Areas• Bolt Report

If an Atext is made blank, any additional information that may have been drawn in orappended to the corresponding area will be suppressed.

4.2 Isometric Drawing Area

201 ‘E’ Denotes east in coordinates

202 ‘N’ Denotes north in coordinates

203 ‘W’ Denotes west in coordinates

204 ‘S’ Denotes south in coordinates

205 ‘EL +’ Denotes a positive elevation in coordinates (up)

206 ‘EL -’ Denotes a negative elevation in coordinates (down)

207 ‘NS’ Denotes a pipe’s nominal size (bore)

208 ‘CONN. TO’ Denotes CONNected TO, where a pipe end is connected toa nozzle

12.04:1


209 ‘CONT. ON’ Denotes CONTinued ON, where a pipe is continued onanother drawing sheet. See also Atext 276.

210 ‘F’ Denotes a flange (used as the material list pointer forflanges)

211 ‘G’ Denotes a gasket (used as the material list pointer forgaskets)

212 ‘B’ Denotes a bolt (used as the material list pointer for bolts)

213 ‘SPINDLE’ Used to show the spindle direction of a valve when it is not aprimary direction

214 ‘MM’ Denotes millimetres (used at angle valves etc.)

215 ‘REDUCING FLANGE’

Message pointing to any reducing flange

216 ‘OFFSET’ Message used where an offset occurs. For example, ateccentric reducers, offset reducing flanges, offset blocksetc.

279 ‘L’ Denotes a lap joint stub end (used as the material listpointer for LJSEs)

217 ‘MITRE’ Denotes mitre-type bend (see also Atext 231)

218 ‘LOBSTER’ Denotes lobster-type bend (see also Atext 231)

219 ‘REINFORCED’ Message pointing to any reinforced tee (symbol key TERF)

220 ‘LEFT LOOSE’ Message pointing to any flange where attribute LOOSE isset to TRUE

221 ‘FFW’ Message pointing to any field-fitted weld (symbol key WF)

222 ‘FALL’ Denotes a falling pipeline.

223 ‘ ’ If left blank, this Atext automatically produces the symbol forfalling lines specified in degrees

224 ‘:’ Used for falling lines specified as a ratio (e.g. 1:10)

225 ‘ ’ If left blank, this Atext automatically produces the % symbolfor falling lines specified as a percentage

226 ‘ GRAD’ Used for falling lines specified in grads

227 ‘ PER M’ Used for falling lines specified in metric units, to indicatemillimetres per metre

228 ‘PER FT’ Used for falling lines specified in imperial units, to indicateinches per foot

229 ‘SCREWED END’ Message pointing to any open ended pipe whose HCON orTCON is set to SCRD

230 ‘VENT’ Message pointing to any pipe end whose HCON or TCON isset to VENT

12.04:2


231 ‘BEND’ Associated with Atexts 217 and 218.

236 ‘S’ Denotes that a support exists at a component.

237 ‘”’ Indicates inches

238 ‘’’ Indicates feet

239 ‘DRAIN’ Message pointing to any pipe end whose HCON or TCON isset to DRAN

240 ‘ ’ This Atext is blank by default. It can be used to produce amessage at any pipe end whose HCON or TCON is set toOPEN.

241 ‘ ’ This Atext is blank by default. It can be used to produce amessage at any pipe end whose HCON or TCON is set toCLOS.

242 ‘ ’ This Atext is blank by default. It can be used to produce amessage at any pipe end whose HCON or TCON is not oneof the recognised ends; i.e. not SCRD, VENT, DRAN, OPENor CLOS.

243 ‘ ’ This Atext is blank by default. If it is set to any word (e.g.FLAT), eccentric reducers will have the orientation of theirflat side indicated by that word.Note that this Atext is used with Atexts 244, 245, 246, 247,248 and 249.See also the note following Atext 283.

244 ‘UP’ For use in conjunction with Atexts 243 and 283

245 ‘DOWN’ For use in conjunction with Atexts 243 and 283

246 ‘NORTH’ For use in conjunction with Atexts 243 and 283

247 ‘SOUTH’ For use in conjunction with Atexts 243 and 283

248 ‘EAST’ For use in conjunction with Atexts 243 and 283

249 ‘WEST’ For use in conjunction with Atexts 243 and 283

275 ‘SWEPT TEE’ Message pointing to any tee whose symbol key is TSBW

276 ‘CONT. FROM’ Denotes CONTinued FROM, where a pipe is continued fromanother drawing sheet.See also Atext 255 in Title Block Area.

277 ‘ORIFICE FLANGE’ Message pointing to orifice flanges

278 ‘DIAL FACE’ Message pointing to instrument dials (symbol keys IDPLand IDFL)

280 ‘TAPPING’ Message pointing to orifice plates

281 ‘TAIL’ Message pointing to spectacle blinds and slip plates

282 ‘WINDOW’ Message pointing to sight glasses

12.04:3


283 ‘FLAT’ Used to indicate the orientation of the flat side of aneccentric reducer when the reducer is skewed. Note that this Atext is used with Atexts 244, 245, 246, 247,248 and 249.See also the following note.

284 ‘TEE BEND’ Message pointing to bends that have an offline leg

286 ‘ ’ This Atext is blank by default. If it is set, a message will beoutput at screwed erection fittings.

287 ‘ORIENTATION DIRECTION’

Shows the orientation of a skewed olet which has nothing,or only a plug, attached.

288 ‘PIPE’ Used on system isometrics to show the position(s) of anychange of Pipe reference.

289 ‘MATL’ Message pointing to any place in the pipe where thespecification changes if Dimensiontype is in force (see theSPECBREAK command). The names of the old and newspecifications are automatically included. (See also Atext232.)

290 ‘INSUL’ Message pointing to any place in the pipe where thespecification changes if Dimensiontype is in force (see theSPECBREAK command). The names of the old and newspecifications are automatically included.

291 ‘TRACE’ Message pointing to any place in the pipe where thespecification changes if Dimensiontype is in force (see theSPECBREAK command). The names of the old and newspecifications are automatically included.

292 ‘PAINT’ Message pointing to any place in the pipe where thespecification changes if Dimensiontype is in force (see theSPECBREAK command). The names of the old and newspecifications are automatically included.

298 ‘TEE ELBOW’ Message pointing to elbows that have an offline leg

337 ‘D BEND RADIUS’ Shows radius of pulled bend in multiples of the pipediameter

338 ‘BEND RADIUS’ Shows radius of pulled bend in current distance units (mmor inch)

349 ‘PP’ Used as a heading for personnel protection insulation.

350 ‘REDUCING ELBOW’

Message pointing to reducing elbows. Note that this text isalso used on the Material List.

454 ‘CONNECTION ORIENTATION’

Shows the orientation of a skewed fabricated tee which hasnothing connected.

477 ‘PER 10 FT’ Message showing imperial fall accuracy.

12.04:4


Note: Atext 243 produces the flat side message for reducers in orthogonal piping and Atext283 is used for reducers in non-orthogonal piping.ISODRAFT indicates the flat side of an eccentric reducer by default only when thereducer is skewed. By using Atexts 243 and 283, you may have the flat sideindicated, or not, for skewed-only or all reducers.

Text for reference dimensions. On the plot, $ is replaced by a new line, and ? is replacedby the name of the element or one of its parents.

4.3 Title Block Area

478 ‘PER 100 FT’ Message showing imperial fall accuracy.

451 ‘TAPPING COORDINATES’

Shows coordinates of tapping points for offline legs on user-defined multiway PCOMs

460 BEAM $?

461 COLUMN $?

462 ? $BUILDING CL

463 CL EQUIPMENT $?

464 CL PIPELINE $?

465 ? $FLOOR LEVEL

466 ? $WALL

467 GRID LINE $?

468 ?

250 ‘DATE’ The actual date is appended automatically in the requiredformat (see DATE). This Atext also uses Atexts 258 to 269, inclusive, if the dateformat is set to UK.

251 ‘PROJECT NO’ Used if the project number is to be plotted (seePROJECTNUMBER)

252 ‘BATCH REF’ The PDMS zone name is appended automatically

253 ‘PIPING SPEC’ The value of the attribute SPEC from the element PIPE isappended automatically

254 ‘ISS’ The value of the attribute REV (i.e. the revision level) fromthe element PIPE is appended automatically

255 ‘DRG’ Used only when a pipe is split over multiple drawing sheets.This Atext is used in conjunction with Atext 256 (in theformat DRG 1 OF 2) or with Atext 276 (in the format CONT.FROM DRG 1).

12.04:5


4.4 Plotted Material List

256 ‘OF’ Used in conjunction with Atext 255

257 ‘SPL’ Denotes a SPOOL drawing. Sequential numbering, startingat 1 for each pipe, is appended automatically.

258 ‘JAN’ 259 ‘FEB’ 260 ‘MAR’261 ‘APR’262 ‘MAY’263 ‘JUN’264 ‘JUL’ 265 ‘AUG’266 ‘SEP’ 267 ‘OCT’268 ‘NOV 269 ‘DEC’

258 ‘JAN’ to 269 ‘DEC’ All used in conjunction with Atext250 (for UK date formats)

270 ‘THERMAL INSULATION SPEC’

The value of the attribute ISPE of the element PIPE isappended automatically

271 ‘TRACING SPEC’ The value of the attribute TSPE of the element PIPE isappended automatically

272 ‘PAINTING SPEC’ The value of the attribute PTSP of the element PIPE isappended automatically

300 ‘FABRICATION MATERIALS’

The heading for components whose SHOP attribute is set toTRUE and for pipe selected from a specification with a?SHOP set to TRUE

310 ‘ERECTION MATERIALS’

The heading for components whose SHOP attribute is set toFALSE and for pipe selected from a specification with no?SHOP or with a ?SHOP set to FALSE

301 ‘PT’ The part number pointer, used in conjunction with Atext 302

302 ‘NO’ Used in conjunction with Atext 301

303 ‘COMPONENT DESCRIPTION’

The sub-heading for the item description column

304 ‘N.S.’ Denotes nominal size (bore) of a pipe or component

305 ‘ITEM CODE’ The sub-heading for the item code column

306 ‘QTY’ Denotes quantity

307 ‘PIPE’ The sub-heading under which pipe is listed

308 ‘FITTINGS’ The sub-heading under which pipe fittings (elbows, teesetc.) are listed

12.04:6


309 ‘FLANGES’ The sub-heading under which flanges are listed

311 ‘GASKETS’ The sub-heading under which gaskets are listed

312 ‘BOLTS’ The sub-heading under which bolts are listed

313 ‘VALVES / IN-LINE ITEMS’

The sub-heading under which valves and in-line items arelisted

314 ‘INSTRUMENTS’ The sub-heading under which instruments are listed

315 ‘SUPPORTS’ The sub-heading under which supports are listed

339 ‘MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS’

The sub-heading under which additional items are listed

316 ‘PIPE SPOOLS’ The sub-heading under which spool numbers are listed

319 ‘CUT PIPE LENGTHS’

The heading under which cut pipe lengths are listed

320 ‘PIECE’ The sub-heading to Atext 319 which identifies individual cutpipe lengths. Used in conjunction with Atext 321.

321 ‘NO’ Used in conjunction with Atext 320

322 ‘CUT’ The sub-heading to Atext 319 which indicates the actuallengths of the cut pipes listed. Used in conjunction withAtext 323

323 ‘LENGTH’ Used in conjunction with Atext 322

324 ‘REMARKS’ The sub-heading to Atext 319 under which Atexts 326, 327,or 328 will be listed if applicable

326 ‘PLD BEND’ Listed under Atext 324 if a cut pipe length contains a pulledbend

327 ‘LOOSE FLG’ Listed under Atext 324 if a cut pipe length contains a looseflange

328 ‘FF WELD’ Listed under Atext 324 if a cut pipe length contains a fittedfield weld

334 ‘S’ Used with fixed length piping. This Atext is appended to theitem code when one end of a fixed length spool has aspecial flange

335 ‘WITH SPECIAL RATING FLANGE(S) (SEE ISO)’

Used with fixed length piping. This Atext is appended to thedescription. Used in conjunction with Atext 334.

341 ‘EQUIPMENT TRIM MATERIALS’

Used as a heading for material lists in equipment trimisometrics

342 ‘NOZZLE REF -’ Used as a subheading for each group of componentsrelated to a particular Nozzle in an equipment trim MTO list

343 ‘CONTINUED’ Indicates that the listing for a Nozzle in an equipment trimisometric is continued from a previous drawing sheet

12.04:7


4.5 Line Summary AreaThe symbol identification texts that are used in the line summary area, along the bottom ofthe isometric drawing, can be changed or made blank.

If one of these Atexts is changed, the corresponding symbol will still be drawn. If the Atext ismade blank, the corresponding symbol will not be drawn in the line summary area.

The following texts are all used as explanatory captions for the examples of drawingsymbols used on the isometrics.

345 ‘AND’ Used to separate parts of an equipment trim MTO listbetween connected Nozzles

346 ‘GEARBOX ORIENTATION’

Used for all valves created with a P11 to show theorientation of P11

347 ‘ ’ This Atext is blank by default. It is used to set text at thebottom of the material list on the master drawing to showthat the information is continued on another sheet. If it isdefined, it will override the standard Atexts 209, 255 and256.

348 ‘ ’ This Atext is blank by default. It is used to set text at the topof the material list on an overflow drawing to show that theinformation is continued on another sheet. If it is defined, itwill override the standard Atexts 276, 255 and 256.

350 ‘REDUCING ELBOW’

The subheading under which reducing elbows are listed.Note that this text is also used in the drawing area.

377 ‘PLD TEE’ The entry in the REMARKS column of the cutting or materiallist for tube pieces including pulled tee.

378 ‘SETON TEE’ The entry in the REMARKS column of the cutting or materiallist for tube pieces including set-on tee.

480 ‘SPOOL’ This Atext is used in headings to show the spool number.

481 ‘NO SPOOL’ This Atext is used in headings for components which are notincluded in any spool.

400 ‘TRACED PIPE’401 ‘LAGGED PIPE’402 ‘PIPE SUPPORT’403 ‘COMPN JOINT’404 ‘SCREWED JOINT’405 ‘SOCKET WELD’406 ‘FIELD WELD407 ‘SHOP WELD411 ‘SITE CONNECTION’

The following Atexts also appear in the line summary area:

12.04:8


4.6 Printed Material ListThe Atexts that are used in the printed material list only are:

4.7 Weld Box SummaryThe Atexts used in the weld box summary are as follows:

Note: The vertical lines (|) shown in these examples are an essential part of the Atext andmust be input at the keyboard with the required text. The positioning of these linesdetermines the output format.

317 ‘PIPE NS’ Used in conjunction with Atext 318. The total centre linelength for each bore is calculated automatically and listedagainst this caption.

318 ‘CL LENGTH’ Used, in conjunction with Atext 317, to summarise centreline lengths

410 ‘[1] DENOTES PIPE SPOOL NO DENOTES PARTS LIST NO’

A standard explanatory note

408 ‘ ’ Normally left blank. Can be used to add explanatory textin the line summary area. For example:

ATEXT 408 ‘PULLED BEND RADIUS IS 3 x NOMINAL PIPE BORE’

409 ‘ ’ Normally left blank. Can be used to add explanatory textin the line summary area. For example:

ATEXT 409 ‘ALL FLANGES 150 LB RATING UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE’

1

329 ‘M’ Denotes metres

330 ‘INS’ Denotes inches

331 ‘MM’ Denotes millimetres

332 ‘PAGE’ A page number is appended automatically

333 ‘PIPELINE REF’ The pipe name is appended automatically

336 ‘SYSTEM REF’ Used to identify system isometrics. The system name isappended automatically.

412 ‘WELD |SHOP |WELD |WELDER |VISUAL |NDT |HARD S.R |FAB.QA’

413 ‘NO |/FLD |PROC ID |ACCEPT |NO | NO | |ACCEPT’

12.04:9


4.8 Bend TableThe Atexts below are all titles of columns in the bend table:

4.9 Dynamic Detail Areas479 ‘DETAIL’

This Atext is used to label items shown in separate detail plots, and also as headings for thedetail plots themselves.

4.10 Bolt ReportThe Atexts below are used in the Bolt Report titles:

325 ‘LENGTH’

351 ‘FAB’

352 ‘EREC’

353 ‘BOLT DESCRIPTION’

455 ‘POSITIONS WRT’

470 ‘PT NO’ Part Number.

471 ‘NB’ Nominal Bore.

472 ‘A’ Dimension A.

473 ‘B’ Dimension B.

474 ‘C’ Dimension C.

475 ‘ANGLE’ The bend angle.

476 ‘RADIUS’ The bend radius.

12.04:10

ISODRAFT Reference ManualMaterial Control File

5 Material Control File

5.1 IntroductionThe Material Control File is an ASCII file which contains a record of all materialsincorporated into the isometric drawing, including piping components, tube, bolts, etc. It canbe used to pass details of material requirements to an external material control program.

A Material Control File is produced for each ISODRAW DETAIL command. The filegenerated during a multiple plot run contains material records for all pipelines detailed bythat command.

5.2 Creating a Material Control FileTo create a basic material control file, use the command:

MATControl filename

where filename is the name of a file in the operating system directory. If a file of the givenname exists, new data will be added to the end of it. If filename does not exist, a new file iscreated.

The format of the material control file is described in File Format.

You can create a more detailed material control file by using the EXTENDED command asfollows:

MATControl filename EXTended

The extended material control file contains the information contained in the basic materialcontrol file (see File Format), plus the following:

• Part numbers (in word 8 of component records)• Item descriptions (as record -21)• File header with:

-5 record (originating program/version) -3 record (title block information)

Note: Always delete files once the data has been transferred to the external materialcontrol system, to avoid wasting disk space.

5.3 File FormatThe data in the file is coded so as to produce a tabulated record of the quantity of each typeof component for each pipeline drawing.

12.05:1


Each pipeline record sequence begins with a general header, which includes referencesand specifications applicable to the pipeline as a whole, followed by a detailed breakdown ofthe individual items.

The codes used to identify the records are defined in the following sections.

The definitions may be understood more easily by referring to the example in Example of aMaterial Control File Output, bearing in mind that only relevant records occur in any givencase.

5.3.1 Overall File StructureThe general file header record sequence may be summarised as follows:

The overall record sequence for each pipeline may be summarised as shown below.

RecordNo.

Contents

-5 Originating program(s)-3 Title block information

12.05:2


5.3.2 Material Control File Record Identification NumbersThe file section relating to each pipeline or drawing begins with a general header (recordscoded -6 to -19) and continues with a separate record for each specific category ofinformation. A detailed breakdown of the information format for each of these categories isgiven in the next subsection. The meanings of the various record type identificationnumbers are as follows:

The record formats are as follows (FORTRAN format):

5.3.3 Individual Formats for Each Type of Information RecordThe following tables show the information which is output for each type of record, listed inthe word order in which it is output. A word in this context means one specific item ofinformation.

Record no. >0: 14I5

Record no. <0: I5, 3X, A13

RecordNo.

Contents

-1

-6-7-8-9

-10-11-12-13-14-15-16-17-19-20

5060

100200300400500600700800

Overflow text record (used with all types of text records)

Pipeline reference (name or refno)User-defined spool prefix identifierRevision identifier (i.e. issue number)Project identifier (i.e. project number)Batch reference (Zone or Area name)Piping specification referenceNominal pressure rating (class)Line type identifierDate of data transferInsulation specification referenceTracing specification referencePainting specification referencePipeline operating temperatureItem Code

Number of spools plus drawing identificationCentreline length summaryTubeFittings (fabrication type)FlangesGasketsBoltsValves and other in-line componentsInstrumentsSupports

-3 Titleblock information-5 Originating program

Once per file

-21-25

Item DescriptionSystem Isometric reference

-29 Equipment trim reference

9001000

MiscellaneousMiscellaneous

12.05:3


The effect of these formats on the output will be most easily seen by studying the outputsample listing given in Example of a Material Control File Output.

Note: Each type of record has provision for up to 14 words, each word having an integerfield of length five. Only the number of words actually used for a particular type ofrecord is listed in the corresponding table.

• Record Number 50:Spool Count, Drawing Number and Number of Drawings

• Record Number 60:Centreline Length Summary

Note: Each type 60 record can accommodate up to six sizes of tube (i.e. up to six differentnominal bores). If a drawing sheet contains more than six bore sizes, more than onetype 60 record will be created. These will be written consecutively to the file.The dimensional units specified by word 2 in record 60 are applicable to allsubsequent records up to the next set of header information; i.e. up to the -6identifier for the next pipeline.

WordPositionNumber

Field Information Comments(inc. range of valid valuesand purpose if applicable)

1

2

3

4

Record type number Set to 50

Number of spoolson drawing

Set to appropriate number ofspools on drawing

Drawing number Used when a pipeline splits ontomore than one drawing sheet(e.g. `2' in 2 of 4)

Number ofdrawings

Used when a pipeline splits ontomore than one drawing sheet(e.g. `4' in 2 of 4)

WordPositionNumber


1 Record type number Set to 60

2 Dimensional units indicator

Units col. = boresTens col. = bolts

0 = Imperial bores

1 = Imperial bores and lengths2 = Metric bores and lengths

Metric lengths

3 Nominal bore Bores in mm or 1/16th inches

4 Centreline length Lengths in 1/10 m or 1/10 ft











12.05:4


• Record Number 100:Tube

• Record Number 200:Fittings

• Record Number 300:Flanges

WordPositionNumber



2 Primary bore Bores in mm or 1/16 inches

3 Secondary bore

4 Third bore(if required)

Bores in mm or 1/16 inches


5 Quantity/length Tube lengths in 1/10 m or 1/10 ft

6 Fab/Erec marker 1 = Fabrication2 = Erection

7 not used

8 Part number

WordPositionNumber




3 Secondary bore




5 Quantity Set to number of fitting types


required

7 not used

8 Part number

12.05:5


• Record Number 400:Gaskets

• Record Number 500:Bolts

WordPositionNumber




3 Secondary bore




5 Quantity Set to number of flanges


required

7 not used

8 Part number

WordPositionNumber




3 Secondary bore




5 Quantity Set to number of gaskets


required

7 not used

8 Part number

12.05:6


• Record Number 600:Valves and In-line Items

• Record Number 700:Instruments

WordPositionNumber



2 Bolt diameter Diameters in mm or 1/16th inches

3

4

5 Quantity Set to number of bolts required


Not used

Not used

7 Bolt length Bolt lengths in mm

8 Part number

WordPositionNumber




3 Secondary bore




5 Quantity Set to number of items required


7 Not used

8 Part number

12.05:7


• Record Number 800:Supports and Hangers

• Record Number 900:Miscellaneous Component Record with Unit Quantity

WordPositionNumber




3 Secondary bore




5 Quantity Set to number of instruments


required

7 Not used

8 Part number

WordPositionNumber




3 Secondary bore




5 Quantity Set to number of supports and/or


hangers required

7 Not used

8 Part number

12.05:8


• Record Number 1000:Miscellaneous Component Record with Length Quantity

5.4 Example of a Material Control File Output-6 WTZA601-8 1

-10 RJK51->-11 M150-12 150-13 WELD-14 29/01/87-15 LAG150 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 060 0 96 73 64 73 16 23 0 0 0 0 0 0

100 96 0 0 62 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0-20 PML40100 64 0 0 60 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0-20 PML40100 16 0 0 20 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0-20 PML80200 96 64 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0-20 REBW200 96 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0-20 ELBW

WordPositionNumber



2 Component Bore or Bolt Bores in mm or 1/16 inches, or zero

3

4

5 Quantity Set to number of components


required

7 Bolt Length

8 Part number

DiameterNot used

Not used

In mm or zero

WordPositionNumber



2 Component Bore Bores in mm or 1/16 inches, or zero

3

4

5 Quantity In 1/10 m or 1/10 ft


7

8 Part number

Not used

Not used

(Length)

Not used

12.05:9


200 64 64 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0...300 16 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0-20 FMM150SW...400 64 0 0 5 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0-20 JC150R2...500 12 0 0 16 2 76 0 0 0 0 0 0 0-20 BM3/4X76...600 64 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0-20 VBFL...

12.05:10

ISODRAFT Reference ManualError Messages

A Error Messages

This appendix lists ISODRAFT error messages that may be output to the screen andmessage file.

• Messages generated by ISODRAFT itself have message numbers beginning with 33.• Messages generated by the ISODRAW module within ISODRAFT have message

numbers beginning with 35. In most cases these will arise only when the program limitshave been reached, and you should contact the AVEVA Customer Services Team.

Any other messages that may be output are not described here as they are not specific toISODRAFT.

Note: Many of the messages you will see when using ISODRAFT result from design orcataloguing errors, not from errors in using ISODRAFT. For this reason a dataconsistency check is strongly advised before ISODRAFT is used.

The error messages can include variables, presented in this appendix as follows:

integer an integer

realno a real (i.e. non-integer) number

name an item name (general context)

name/refno a name of an item (or refno if unnamed)

filename a PDMS filename

text an alphanumeric character string

(33:1) Paper size A4 to A0 only allowed

See the SIZE command.

(33:2) ISO 1,2,3,4 only allowed

See the ISO command.

(33:3) AREA must be between 1 & 10

See the WASTAGE AREA command.

(33:110) BAD RETURN FILE

The list of pipes successfully detailed by ISODRAW cannot be read.

(33:114) VALUE MUST BE BETWEEN 1 AND 25

The maximum number of lines permitted in the title block area is 25.

12.0A:1


(33:116) VALUE MUST BE BETWEEN 201 AND 500

The Atext numbers of texts which can be changed by the ATEXT commandmust be within the specified range. See Recommendations for ImportingDXF files from ISODRAFT into MicroStation for more information on Atexts

(33:121) PAPER LENGTH must be greater than ZERO

This is self-explanatory.

(33:123) SPEC REF name gives material code ( text ) longer than max of integercharacters

The itemcode derived from the component’s name is longer than the widthallowed in the itemcode column in the material list (see the ITEMCODEcommand).

(33:124) VALUE between 1 & 20 only

The identifying number allocated in a KEYS command must be within thespecified range.

(33:147) INST name/refno is not named

Itemcodes for instruments are currently defined as PDMS names (probablyby default) and an instrument has been found without a name.

(33:149) SYSTEM ERROR Unable to scan pipe network

Check data consistency report and flow directions at branchconnections.

There is a design inconsistency which prevents ISODRAFT from detailingthe specified pipeline. Run a data consistency check to find probablesources of error. In some cases this error may be produced by aconfiguration which is legal but which cannot currently be scanned byISODRAFT. This problem can usually be resolved by splitting the pipe intomore branches.

(33:150) BAD NAME/REF

A name or reference specified for detailing cannot be accessed.

(33:151) Too many items in DETAIL list

The Detail list cannot contain more than 100 items.

(33:152) Can’t remove NAME/REF

A name or reference specified in a Remove list cannot be accessed. Inparticular, note that World must not occur in a Remove list.

(33:153) Too many items in REMOVE list

The Remove list cannot contain more than 100 items.

(33:155) The DETAIL list is empty

Either there are no items in the Add list or the items specified in the Removelist have completely cancelled out those specified in the Add list, leavingnothing to be detailed.

12.0A:2


(33:156) PLOT FILE NAME/PREFIX or TERM have not been specified

The output destination (terminal or named file) must be specified beforeISODRAFT can detail anything.

(33:157) NO PIPES HAVE BEEN PROCESSED SUCCESSFULLY

ISODRAFT has failed to detail any pipes. The reasons may be suggested byother error messages generated during the detailing processes

(33:158) MORE THAN 100 BRANCHES IN PIPE name/refno

ISODRAFT cannot cope with more than 100 branches in one pipeline.

(33:159) NO BRANCHES IN PIPE name/refno

This is self-explanatory.

(33:160) name/refno will not be detailed

The specified Pipe or Branch cannot be detailed by ISODRAFT. The reasonmay be found in another message or a data consistency report.

(33:162) HEAD & TAIL refs of BRANCH name/refno refer to the same componentbut head & tail positions are not close enough to that component

There is an error in the identified branch, which has both ends connected tothe component. This should not normally occur.

(33:163) HEAD & TAIL refs of BRANCH name/refno refer to the same componentand head & tail positions are the same

There is an error in the identified branch, which has both ends connected tothe component. This should not normally occur.

(33:164 Component name/refno refers to a BRANCH ( name/refno ) which doesnot refer back to it

There is an inconsistency between the connection attribute of thecomponent and the branch to which it refers. For example:

(33:165) The HEAD of name/refno is connected to name/refno but the positionsare not the same

(33:166) The TAIL of name/refno is connected to name/refno but the positions arenot the same

There is an inconsistency between the HPOS or TPOS attribute of thebranch and the p-point of the component to which it should be attached.

(33:167) ELEMENT name/refno is not a piping component

An element found while detailing a pipe is not of an appropriate type.

Branch head/tailpoints elsewhereTee points

to branch

12.0A:3


(33:168) Cannot find FLANGE to match PPOINT integer of name/refno

The connection reference on the given p-point needs to be accessed todetermine the bolting requirements. This message means either that theconnection reference is unset or invalid, or that a component of type FLANcannot be found on that connection

(33:169) Cannot find end of WAFER at name/refno

The other end of the wafer fitting at the specified location cannot be found.Connection types commencing with W must be used in pairs.

(33:170) BOLTING BRANCH Table full

(33:171) BOLTING MULTIWAY COMPONENT Table full

These tables keep account of those items which have already beenaccessed for bolting requirements. The limits are 100 items in the BranchTable and 200 items in the Multiway Component Table.

(33:172) No non-standard BOLT lengths for SBOLT name/refnoLENGTH is realno

(33:173) No long enough non-standard BOLT lengths for name/refno

See AVEVA PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 3, CataloguingRequirements.

(33:174) No SPCOM for name/refno

The item specified has no component specification from which boltingrequirements (the BLTREF attribute) can be derived. See AVEVA PDMSISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 3, Cataloguing Requirements.

(33:175) No BOLTS for SPCOM name/refno

The SPCOM for the specified item does not have its BLTREF attribute setand so its bolting requirements cannot be determined. See AVEVA PDMSISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 3, Cataloguing Requirements

(33:176) Invalid SPCOM name/refno for component, or tube connected to, name/refno

A component, or the implied tube connected directly to it, does not have avalid specification reference (SPRE or LSTU). Check the data consistencyreport.

(33:177) Cannot get DETAIL info. on SPCOM name/refno

(33:178) Cannot get MATXT info. on SPCOM name/refno

These indicate possible cataloguing errors. The SPCOMs specified do nothave the appropriate attributes set for the data needed by ISODRAFT. SeeAVEVA PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 3, CataloguingRequirements.

(33:179) Reference datum name/refno is unnamed

No text will be shown for the reference dimension on the isometric.

12.0A:4


(33:180) PWAST attribute from SPCOM name/refno out of range 0.00 - 100.0

The wastage allowance attribute must be set to a percentage figure between0 and 100%. See the WASTAGE AREA command.

(33:181) BOLT TABLE FULL

The number of different bolts which can be processed in a single pipe islimited to 1000.

(33:182) name/refno connected to name/refno but not the other way round

(33:183) name/refno not close enough to name/refno

(33:184) ARRIVE or LEAVE PPOINT greater than 4

ISODRAFT can only deal with 4-way components whose arrive or leaveppoints are not greater than 4.

(33:185) Multi-way component name/refno is not connected where expected

(33:187) Both legs of name/refno refer to the same BRANCH but positions arenot the same.

(33:188) Both legs of name/refno refer to the same BRANCH and positions arethe same.

(33:189) One leg of name/refno is connected to name/refno but the positions arenot the same.

Errors (33:182) to (33:189) all indicate possible errors in the DESIGNdatabases. Check the data consistency report and correct errors using adesign module.

(33:190) CANNOT OPEN OPTIONS WORK FILE : ERROR integer

(33:191) CANNOT OPEN MESSAGE FILE : ERROR integer

(33:192) OPTIONS STATE IS LOST OPTIONS RESTORED TO DEFAULTS

These indicate system filing errors, possibly due to a disc overflow. In mostcases further explanatory messages will be output.

(33:193) MESSAGE FILE NOT SET

A file for output messages must be specified before ISODRAFT can beginany detailing. See the MESSAGEFILENAME command.

(33:195) BRANCH name/refno is not in the network

A pipe must have all its branches connected to each other in order to bedetailed. The branch specified does not appear to be connected in this way.

(33:196) name/refno has already been detailed

The Pipe or Branch specified has its Detail Flag set to TRUE. It may bedetailed by using the MARK IGNORE ON option, or by resetting the DETAattribute to FALSE in a design module.

12.0A:5


(33:197) SYSTEM WARNING - MATERIAL NAME TABLE OVERFLOW - MAXinteger NAMES

This could occur on isometrics which incorporate a very large number ofdifferent items. It could result in items with the same itemcodes, but withdifferent suffixes, being treated as different items.

(33:198) ATTACHMENT POINT name/refno HAS NO STEXT

An ATTA being used as a comment (ATTY set to CCCC or CCNN) has notext stored in its STEXT attribute.

(33:199) ERROR IN DETERMINING BOLTING FOR name/refno

See Bolting for information on the cataloguing requirements for bolts.

(33:200) Unable to access PIPE SPEC name/refno

A pipe specification referenced by a pipe specified in a detailing command isnot accessible in the current MDB.

(33:203) BAD CONNECTION TO name/refno

This suggests a possible error in the HREF or TREF of a branch. Check thedata consistency report and rectify errors using a design module.

(33:252) Unable to locate text text within itemcode

The locating text specified in a BOLT LENGTH ITEM INSERT AT ‘text’command (see the BOLTING command) cannot be found in the itemcode fora bolt. ISODRAFT will use the default format for this bolt in the itemcode listand outputs this message for information only.

(33:267) name/refno - Illegal or Inaccessible Reference Datum point

The reference dimension is pointing to an incorrect or non-existent element.

(33:268) Reference datum name/refno - Orientation has been modified toprevent Doubleback Dimension error

The reference dimension requested for a Structure is parallel to thecentreline. A reasonable orientation has been chosen instead.

(33:269) Dimension omitted for Reference datum name/refno - DoublebackDimension

The reference dimension requested for a Piping component or Section isparallel to the centreline.

(33:299) Illegal scale factor found for line flow arrow - default scale 8 used

The scale factor for in-line flow arrows must be in the range 5 to 15 inclusive.

(33:331) Illegal HREF connection on BRAN name/refno

(33:332) Illegal TREF connection on BRAN name/refno

The Head or Tail Reference of the Branch being detailed is invalid. It mayhave been deleted, or it may be in a DB which is not current in the MDB.

12.0A:6


(33:338) User defined symbol library has not been specified

You have tried to define a symbol without first specifying a symbol library filein which to store the definition. See AVEVA PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide,Chapter 11, Symbol Keys.

(33:340) Limit of integer user defined symbols exceeded

(33:341) Symbol key text rejected

You have tried to define more symbols than the current maximum limit of300. The specified symbol will not be added to the symbol library. SeeAVEVA PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 11, Symbol Keys.

(33:343) Error in updating symbol library

An existing symbol file cannot be overwritten. Check that you have sufficientaccess rights.

(33:345) Unable to create new symbol library text

A new symbol file cannot be created. Check that you have sufficient accessrights.

(33:346) Error reading symbol library text

An existing symbol file cannot be read. Check that you have sufficientaccess rights.

(33:347) Unable to locate key text in symbol library

The specified SKEY cannot be found in the current symbol library.

(33:348) Row number integer is outside the range 1-999

(33:349) Table number integer is outside the range 1-999

You have exceeded the limits of table definition for user-positioned text. Seethe ATEXT command.

(33:350) Limit of integer user positional text records exceeded

You have tried to position more than the current maximum limit of 100 textfields. See the ATEXT command.

(33:351) Character size integer exceeds maximum limit of 99

You have specified a character height greater than the maximum limit of99mm. See the ATEXT command.

(33:361) Option number integer is outside the allowed range 1-140

Debug options must lie within the range 1-140.

(33:363) Balloon size integer is outside the allowed range 1-5

You have specified an instrument balloon size outside the permitted range of1-5 character widths.

(33:365) The no of components :- integer is outside the allowed range 1-50

You may only turn off fallskew boxes for lengths of pipeline which contain nomore than 50 components. See the FALLSKEWS command.

12.0A:7


(33:368) SPOOLNumbers must be positioned with table parameters

User-positioned text for spool numbers must include X and Y offsets withinits definition to form a tabular layout. See the POSITION command.

(33:386) Bend radius outside allowable range 0 to 50 D

The permitted range for standard bend radii is 0-50 pipe diameters.

(33:387) Illegal value for bend radius

You can not specify a standard bend radius of less than 1mm.

(33:399) Maximum of 20 nested PCOM tappings exceeded

Tapping legs off PCOMs or SHUs can themselves contain PCOMs or SHUswith tapping legs, up to a maximum limit of 20 levels of nesting.

(33:407) Cannot detail at branch level for system iso

Detailing at Branch level is restricted to single pipe isometrics. Systemisometrics must include complete pipes.

(33:408) Plottingscale limits (50-100%) exceeded - reset to 100

Note: The plotting scale is limited to a reduction to a minimum of half size.Magnification is not permitted. The scaling factor has been resetautomatically to 100%.

Note: The following error messages are generated during the operation ofISODRAW. Those numbered (35:10xx) relate to the ISODATprogram and those numbered (35:20xx) relate to the ISOPLOTprogram.

Note: Refer to the AVEVA PDMS Customer Support Department for adviceif you have unexplained errors at this stage of ISODRAFT’soperations.

(35:1001) OVER 200 ALTERNATIVE TEXT RECS FOLLOWING DATA IGNORED

(35:1002) MORE THAN 200 TEXT RECORDS - DEFAULT TABLE USED

The maximum number of non-standard text phrases which may be used atone time is 200 (see the ATEXT command).

(35:1004) FITTING NOT FOUND - DEFAULT SHAPE USED

A specified SKEY is not recognised. The relevant component will beindicated on the isometric drawing by the default rectangle symbol (seeAVEVA PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 11, Symbol Keys).

(35:1006)

to

(35:1014)

OVERFLOW IN DATA - PIPELINE REJECTED

(message number depends on reason for overflow)

This is a fatal error; the isometric will not be plotted.

(35:1015) INVALID ITEM/DESCRIPTION POINTER

12.0A:8


(35:1016) ITEM CODE WIDTH ERROR - APPENDED TEXT LOST

An itemcode contains more characters than the specified column width inthe material list (see the ITEMCODE command).

(35:1017) OVERFLOW IN DATA - CHECK DIMENSIONS

(35:1018) NO FITTING DETAILS EXIST FOR FITTING CODE

(35:1019) FITTINGS OVERLAP WHICH CANNOT BE CUT BACK

(35:1020) INSUFFICIENT LENGTH ON OVERLAPPING FITTINGS TO ALLOWCUTBACK

(35:1021) RUN ABORTED THE WIDTH OR HEIGHT (EXCLUDING BORDERS, MATERIAL LISTETC) IS LESS THAN 50MM. THIS IS NOT ENOUGH ROOM FOR THEISOMETRIC

The layout specified for the drawing sheet does not leave enough room forthe isometric drawing itself. The drawing will not therefore be plotted. Seethe FILE, SIZE and STACKINGARRANGEMENT commands.

(35:1022) THE MATERIAL CODE IS TOO WIDE AND HAS BEEN CHANGED FROM... TO ...

(35:1023) THE TOTAL NUMBER OF ALLOWED CHARACTERS (3,900) IN FREEMESSAGES HAS BEEN EXCEEDED

(35:1024) THE NUMBER OF FREE MESSAGES (50) HAS BEEN EXCEEDED

(35:1025) THE NUMBER OF CHARACTERS IN MESSAGE EXCEED (300) THE (LAST) MESSAGE BEGAN WITH ...

(35:1084) Warning - Support shape not found

(35:1100) Error - Unable to position ref.dimension using coordinates given

- Ref dimension record co-ords are val val val- Ref dimension not shown on drawing

(35:1105) Warning - Reference Dimension key ” ” not found - Default line shown

An invalid or blank SKEY has been used for a reference dimension. SeeAVEVA PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 5, Design Requirements.

(35:2001) DRAWING DELETED

(35:2003) WELD NUMBERS HAVE CAUSED DATA OVERFLOW

(35:2004) INPUT DATA OVERFLOW

(35:2005) WARNING TEE OFF TEE >4 DEEP

(35:2007) TEE IN SKEW

(35:2008) DATA FAULT SKEW

(35:2009) SKEW WITH NO CONTENTS

(35:2010) FITTING WITH OFFSET NOT IN LINE WITH PIPE

12.0A:9


(35:2011) ANGLE FAIL

(35:2012) DATA FAULT

(35:2013) UP DOWN

(35:2014) EAST WEST

(35:2015) NORTH SOUTH

(35:2016) DATA OVERFLOW, DRAWING REJECTED

(35:2017) MESSAGE FAIL

(35:2018) SHAPE FAIL

(35:2020) TOO MANY COORDINATES IN FITTINGS

(35:2021) TOO MANY FITTINGS

(35:2023) WARNING, PAPER SIZE >A0 OR AD - THIS MAY PRODUCEUNACCEPTABLE RESULTS

ISODRAFT does not recognise standard paper sizes larger than A0 or E.Larger sheet sizes can be specified by using the HEIGHT and WIDTHoptions. See the SIZE command.

(35:2024) REJECTED, TOO MUCH DATA, TRY SMALLER SPLIT

(35:2025) ... CHECK

(35:2026) ... FAIL

(35:2027) ... PLOTTED

(35:2028) ... NOT PLOTTED

(35:2029) ... DRG.

These are used in progress summaries in the message file.

(35:2030) WARNING PLOTFILE NUMBER HAS REACHED 999 NEXT PLOTFILE WILL OVERWRITE ...001

PLOT file names are suffixed with a three-digit number to avoid ambiguity.This limits the number of different PLOT files with the same basic file nameto 999. See the FILE command.

(35:2031) THE FOLLOWING DRAWINGS ARE IN PLOTFILE ...

(35:2035) READY FOR NEXT DRAWING. HIT RETURN TO GO

This message appears on screen between plots when more than onedrawing is to be output to a graphics terminal.

(35:2036) THE FOLLOWING DRAWINGS WERE SENT TO THE TERMINAL

(35:2037) ERROR OPENING UNDERLAY PLOTFILE

(35:2038) ERROR READING PLOTFILE

(35:2039) PLOTFILE INCOMPATIBLE PAPER SIZE

12.0A:10


(35:2040) BAD PLOT CODE - PLOTFILE PROBABLY CORRUPT

(35:2041) THE SCHEMA PLOTFILE OPTION HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF

(35:2042) SPECIFIED PLOTFILE LENGTH ...

(35:2043) ... IS LESS THAN DRAWING LENGTH

(35:2044) PLOTFILE LENGTH HAS BEEN INCREASED TO ...

12.0A:11


12.0A:12

ISODRAFT Reference ManualExamples of Isometric Plots

B Examples of Isometric Plots

Figure B:1. Combined Fabrication & Erection Isometric with Materials List

PIPENS(INS)

8

6

CLLENGTH

4.0

17.0

-------------------------

|FABRICATIONMATERIALS|

-------------------------

PT

COMPONENTDESCRIPTION

N.S.

ITEMCODE

QTY

NO

---------------------

(INS)

---------

---

--

-----

PIPE

----

1

PIPESCH40ANSIB36.10API5L-B

8

Pa200

1.2M

2

PIPESCH40ANSIB36.10API5L-B

6

Pa150

11.2M

FITTINGS

--------

3

TEEANSIB16.9BWASTMA234-WPB

8x8

Ta200

1

4

TEEANSIB16.9BWASTMA234-WPB

8x6

TA200X15

2

5

CAPLONGANSIB16.9BWASTMA234-WPB

8

Kc200

2

6

ELBOWLRANSIB16.9BWASTMA234-WPB

8

Ea200

1

7

ELBOWLRANSIB16.9BWASTMA234-WPB

6

Ea150

8

FLANGES

-------

8

FLANGEWNANSIB16.5#150.RFASTMA105

8

Fw200

3

9

FLANGEWNANSIB16.5#150.RFASTMA105

6

Fw150

2

VALVES/IN-LINEITEMS

----------------------

10

VALVESWINGCHKANSIB16.10BW#150ASTM

6

Bc150

2

A216-WCB

11

VALVEGATEANSIB16.10BW#150ASTM

6

Bg150

2

A216-WCB

----------------------

|ERECTIONMATERIALS|

----------------------

PT

COMPONENTDESCRIPTION

N.S.

ITEMCODE

QTY

NO

---------------------

(INS)

---------

---

--

-----

GASKETS

-------

12

GASKETRF1.5MMANSIB16.5#150SS&ASB

8

Gc200

3

13

GASKETRF1.5MMANSIB16.5#150SS&ASB

6

Gc150

2

BOLTS

-----

14

100STUDCW2NUTSASTMA193-B7/2H

13/16

SBBR100

16

15

100STUDCW2NUTSASTMA193-B7/2H

13/16

SBBT100

8

VALVES/IN-LINEITEMS

----------------------

16

VALVEGATEANSIB16.10#150.RF9%NICKEL

8

GA-59

1

STEEL

PIPESPOOLS

-----------

[1][2][3][4]

Outlet_NetworkDRG

1OF1

TRACED

PIPE

LAGGED

PIPE

PIPE

SUPPORT

SITE

CONNECTION

COMPN

JOINT

SCREWED

JOINT

SOCKET

WELD

FIELD

WELD

SHOP

WELD

[1]DENOTESPIPESPOOLNO

1DENOTESPARTSLISTNO

PIPINGSPEC:A1A

BATCHREF:CondensateSystem

DATE:27JUL1998

NN

5

W5146

S4529

EL+4012

[1]8"NS

4 8x6"NS

178

1662

[2]2

7

2100

2

7

2206

2

7 EL+19502062

229

10

407

7

2296

"NS

229

11

F9G13B14

492

CONN.TO

CON-FEED-PUMP-1/N2

W1897

S1538

EL+1950

3 8x8"NS

356

4 8x6"NS

356

166

2

[3]2

7

1600

2

7

1494

2

7 EL+1950

2062

2

1629

10

407

7 229

229

11

403

26"NS

F9G13B14

589

CONN.TO

CON-FEED-PUMP-2/N2

W497

S1538

EL+1950

178

W4078

S4529

EL+4012

5

1

6

1483

F8G12

407

MATL

A150

16 2

92

F8G12

[4]18"NS

F8G12B15

404

CONN.TO

C-108/N1

W4612

S6012

EL+5120

12.0B:1


Figure B:2. Fabrication-Only Isometric

Out

let_

Net

wor

k D

RG

1 O

F 1

TRAC

ED P

IPE

LAG

GE

D P

IPE

PIP

ES

UP

PO

RT

S

ITE

CO

NN

EC

TIO

NC

OM

PNJO

INT

SC

RE

WED

JO

INT

SO

CK

ET W

ELD

FIEL

DW

ELD

SH

OP

WE

LD[1

] DEN

OTE

S P

IPE

SP

OO

L N

O 1

DE

NO

TES

PA

RTS

LIS

T N

O

PIP

ING

SP

EC: A

1AB

ATC

H R

EF: C

onde

nsat

e S

yste

mD

ATE

: 27

JUL

1998

NN

[1]

8"N

S

8x6"

NS

178

1662

[2]

2100

2206

EL

+195

0

2062

22940

722

9

6"N

S

229

492

8x8"

NS

356

8x6"

NS

356

166

2

[3]

1600

1494

EL

+195

0

2062

1629

407

229

229

403

6"NS

589

178

1483

407

MAT

LA

150

292

[4]8"NS

404

12.0B:2


Figure B:3. Erection-Only Isometric

Out

let_

Net

wor

k D

RG

1 O

F 1

TRAC

ED

PIP

ELA

GG

ED

PIP

EPI

PESU

PPO

RT

SI

TEC

ON

NEC

TIO

NC

OM

PNJO

INT

SCR

EW

ED J

OIN

TS

OC

KET

WE

LDFI

ELD

WE

LDSH

OP

WEL

D[1

] DE

NO

TES

PIP

E S

POO

L N

O 1

DE

NO

TES

PAR

TS L

IST

NO

PIP

ING

SPE

C: A

1ABA

TCH

REF

: Con

dens

ate

Syst

emD

ATE:

27

JUL

1998

NN

1

W 5

146

S 45

29EL

+40

12

[1]

8"N

S

8x6"

NS

178

166

2

2

[2]

3

2100

4

5

2206

6

7

EL

+195

02062

229

8

407

9

229

6"N

S

229 10

11

492

CO

NN

. TO

CO

N-F

EE

D-P

UM

P-1

/N2

W 1

897

S 1

538

EL

+195

0

12

8x8"

NS

356

13

8x6"

NS

356

166

14 2

[3]

15

1600

16

17

1494

18 19 EL +

1950

2062

20

1629

21

407

22

229

229

23

403

24

6"NS

2558

9

CO

NN

. TO

CO

N-F

EED

-PU

MP

-2/N

2W

497

S 15

38EL

+19

50

178

26

W 4

078

S 45

29EL

+40

12

27

28

1483

29

407

MAT

LA1

50

292

30

[4]8"NS

31

404

CO

NN

. TO

C-1

08/N

1W

461

2S

6012

EL +

5120

12.0B:3


12.0B:4

ISODRAFT Reference ManualTransferring Data to the COMPIPE Module

C Transferring Data to the COMPIPE Module

PDMS ISODRAFT has a facility to transfer material information to the COMPIPE module ofthe John Brown Systems‘ COMDACE system. This is achieved by the output of two filescontaining COMPIPE Linelist and MTO data. You can control the production and content ofthese files. COMPIPE component Short Codes are accessed direct from the PDMS catalogdatabases, providing pointers into the COMPIPE piping specification.

C.1 Invoking the COMPIPE Interface in ISODRAFTThe COMPIPE interface is switched on by specifying a single file prefix, used to define theLinelist and MTO files. ISODRAFT will create files using this prefix with suffixes of .LINE and.MTO, together with a three digit number of the form 001, taking the next file in sequence inthe directory. To set the file prefix enter the command:

COMPIPEFile /<filename>.

To switch off this facility, enter the command COMPIPEFile OFF.

For example, the command COMPIPEFile /comp would produce Linelist files of the formcomp.LINE001, comp.LINE002, etc. and MTO files of the form comp.MTO001,comp.MTO002, etc.

C.2 Controlling the Contents of the COMPIPE FilesThe options that affect the contents of the COMPIPE files generated by ISODRAFT are:

COMPIPE MTO DRWG Lists material by individual isometric drawingsheet.

COMPIPE MTO PIPE Lists material by complete pipeline.

COMPIPE ITEMcodes User Instructs COMPIPE to use user itemcodes.

COMPIPE ITEMcodes Client Instructs COMPIPE to use client temcodes.

COMPIPE DESCriptions Short Instructs COMPIPE to use short descriptions.

COMPIPE DESCriptions Long Instructs COMPIPE to use long descriptions.

COMPIPE SUPPorts ON Includes supports from the MTO file.

COMPIPE SUPPorts OFF Excludes supports from the MTO file.

12.0C:1


These may be chained. The default condition is COMPIPE MTO DRWG ITEMcodes UserDESCriptions Short SUPPorts ON. Note that a materiallist overflow option other thanMATEriallist DUMMy (the default condition) must be used with COMPIPE MTO DRWG.

C.3 Pipe AttributesFour text attributes of pipe are used by the COMPIPE interface. These are:

The CNUM attribute is available so that a line number may be stored for COMPIPEpurposes that differs from the PDMS pipe NAME. If CNUM is blank or unset, the first 14characters of the NAME will be used. Note that the pipeline DESCRIPTION is output in theLinelist file. This should not be confused with the option for COMPIPE DESCRIPTIONS,which is an instruction in the MTO file to COMPIPE on how to output componentdescriptions in its reports.

C.4 Detail Text AttributesTwo attributes of detail texts (ADTEX - HDTEX) are used by the COMIPE interface. Theseare:

All components, tube and bolts must have a short code, unless they are to be treated inCOMPIPE as out-of-spec items. In this case they may only be handled as additional itemson the material list. If any other component is found to have no short code, no COMPIPEfiles will be generated for the whole pipeline.

For standard assemblies, the short code of ’SAN’ must be used. Standard assemblies arelisted in the MTO file with their itemcodes (truncated to 8 characters) as their standardassembly numbers.

The COMPIPE Specification attribute allows a COMPIPE Specification name to be usedthat differs from the PDMS Pipe Specification name. If CSPC is blank or unset, the PDMSPipe Specification of the component will be used (truncated to 6 characters).

C.5 Limitations

C.5.1 Itemcodes containing the / characterThe slash (/) character is used by default as a delimiter within the Intermediate Data File(transfer file) between itemcodes, short codes and COMPIPE Spec names. Therefore, ifitemcodes are to contain slash characters (e.g. in the case of ITEMCODE LENGTH LONG

CARE COMPIPE area up to 4 characters, mandatory

DESCRIPTION Pipeline description up to 80 characters, optional

CDRG COMPIPE drawing number up to 24 characters, optional

CNUM COMPIPE line number up to 14 characters, optional

SCOD Short Code up to 3 characters, mandatory

CSPC COMPIPE Specification up to 6 characters, optional

12.0C:2


where the specification name is included), an alternative delimiter must be set as ATEXT299. Note that it is the itemcode after SPEC name and trailing delimiter characters havebeen removed that is important. Since the slash character is often used within PDMSnames, ISODRAFT will automatically set Atext 299 to the tilde (~) character whenCOMPIPEFILE is set. This can then be changed if required, e.g. use ATExt 299 ’:’.

C.5.2 Instruments and Supports Tag NamesInstrument and support names will be output in the MTO files only if the optionsINSTruments NAMe and ATTAname SPREf are used. Instrument and support itemcodeswill never be output in the MTO files.

C.5.3 Material per Isometric SheetIn order to obtain MTO per isometric drawing, a material list overflow option that may insertextra sheet numbers should not be used. Instead, use one of:

MATEriallist OVERMATEriallist DUMMy SUFFixMATEriallist DUMMy SUFFix SINGle

If the default option MATEriallist DUMMy is used, a warning occurs in the message file. Itstates ”Compipe material accumulation per drawing conflicts with material list generated onisometric. Compipe materials accumulated per pipeline.” Any isometrics splitting onto morethan one sheet will be accompanied by MTO files listing all materials for the pipeline as if ona single sheet.

C.5.4 Specification BreaksThe output of Alternative Spec records and the subsequent addition of the ’Y’ prefix to eachShort Code from the new specification is affected by the SPECBreak option. If SPECBreakBRANch is used, e.g. to suppress specbreaks for instruments from a special instrumentsspecification on the isometric, then these items will be output in the MTO file as if from thestandard specification.

C.5.5 System and Spool IsometricsCOMPIPE files will not be produced for system isometrics or spool isometrics.

C.5.6 Use of MARK REV, MARK DETAIL, REPEATABILITY ONThese will fail to update the database when COMPIPEFile is used in conjunction with aCNUM. The actual pipe NAME must be used in order to allow these database updates.

12.0C:3


C.6 Format of COMPIPE Linelist FileThe Linelist file contains a single batch header record, followed by a group of three recordsfor each pipeline in the batch:

In the following record definitions, the : character is a field separator, and the * character is arecord terminator.The Batch Header record is defined thus:

BATCH888821JAN99LINEPROJNUMB

where:

The Line List Header record is defined thus:

A:AREA:LINENUMBER:PIPE SPEC:NO OF SHEETS:MAIN SIZE::PAINTSPEC:INSU SPEC::*

where

The Delivery Point Details record is defined thus:

D::::::*

Batch Header

Line List Header for each pipeline

Delivery Point Details for each pipeline

Line Description for each pipeline

BATCH is a fixed record identifier

8888 is a fixed 4 digit batch sequence number

21JAN99 is the run date when the pipe was detailed

LINE is a fixed identifier for a Linelist file

PROJNUMB is the project number (truncated to 8 characters)

A is a fixed record identifier

AREA is from the pipe AREA attribute (max 4 characters)

LINENUMBER is from the pipe CNUM or NAME (truncated to 14characters)

PIPE SPEC is from the pipe PSPEC (truncated to 6 characters)

NO OF SHEETS is the number of isometric sheets for the pipeline, e.g. 02

MAIN SIZE is the largest nominal size in the pipe, of the form 1.1/2, 6,etc. for imperial, and 25, 80, etc. for metric

PAINT SPEC is from the paint specification (truncated to 6 characters)

INSU SPEC is from the insulation specification (truncated to 6characters)

12.0C:4


This is a dummy record, normally used for delivery point and date information during manualinput. Such information is not available from ISODRAFT.

The Line Description record is defined thus:

H:DESCRIPTION*

where:

C.7 Format of COMPIPE MTO FIleThe MTO file contains a single batch header record, followed by a group of records for eachpipeline or isometric sheet:

A maximum of 200 pipelines or isometric sheets may be included in each file. In thefollowing record definitions, the : character is a field separator, and the * character is arecord terminator.

The Batch Header record is defined thus:

BATCH888821JAN99MATOPROJNUMB

where:

The MTO Line Header record is defined thus:

$L:AREA:LINENUMBER:SHEET NO:RUNTYPE::U or C:S or L*

H is a fixed record identifier

DESCRIPTION is from the pipe DESC attribute (max 80 characters). If nodescription has been entered in PDMS, a dummy record ofthe form H:* is output.

Batch Header

MTO Line Header |

MTO Drawing Header | for each pipeline

Component records (onerecord for each materiallist entry)

isometric sheet

BATCH is a fixed record identifier

8888 is a fixed 4 digit batch sequence number

21JAN99 is the run date when the pipe was detailed

MATO is a fixed identifier for an MTO file

PROJNUMB is the project number (truncated to 8 characters)

12.0C:5


where:

The Drawing Header record is defined thus:

$D:DRWGNUMBER::REVISION*

where:

If the CDRG attribute for a pipe is unset or blank, a drawing number will be automaticallygenerated, based on the pipe nominal size and name. This will take the form:

Each component entry on the material list has an equivalent entry in the MTO file.Components are classified as ’in-spec’ being in the specification set at pipe level,’alternative-spec’ being in a different specification, and ’out-of-spec’ being in no pipespecification (a concept PDMS does not have).

The in-Spec Component record is defined thus:n::SHORT CODE:TAG NUMBER:1st NS:2nd NS:3rd NS:QUANTITY:BOLTLENGTH:*

where:

$L is a fixed record identifier

AREA is from the pipe AREA attribute (max 4 characters)

LINENUMBER is from the pipe CNUM or NAME (truncated to 14characters)

SHEET NO is the isometric sheet number, e.g. 01

RUNTYPE is data type transferred, always set to A (Actual)

U or C signifies reports will have User or Client Itemcodes

S or L signifies reports will have Short or Long Descriptions

$D is a fixed record identifier

DRWGNUMBER is from the pipe CDRG attribute (max 24 characters)

REVISION is from the pipe REV attribute (max 2 characters)

1.1/2”PIPENAME for pipes using imperial bores

40MM-PIPENAME for pipes using metric bores (’MM-’ is the default Atext 453)

n = 1 for SHOP flag = TRUE, = 3 for SHOP flag

= FALSE

SHORT CODE is from the detail text’s SCOD (max 3 characters)

TAG NUMBER unique identifier (max 8 characters), see Notes

1st NS is main size, of the form 1.1/2 (imperial) or 40 (metric)

2nd NS is second size (format as for 1st NS)

12.0C:6


Notes:

1. Short code is a reference to a component entry in the Compipe specification. 2. Instruments and supports take a tag number from their PDMS name if the options

INSTruments NAMe and ATTAname SPREf are used. 3. Standard assemblies take a tag number of their itemcode, which is not unique, but is

the same for all assemblies of the same content/configuration, i.e. standard assemblynumber.

4. Quantity is an integer number for components, or a length for tube. For bolts it is thenumber of sets, not the number of bolts. Also for bolts, the size is the pipeline nominalsize, not the bolt diameter.

5. Boltlength is preceded by the character H to indicate an override to COMPIPE. Metriclengths take the form H120.0. Imperial lengths take the form H4.3/4.

Where a change of spec occurs in the pipeline, an Alternative Spec record is output,defined thus:

n::YY:ALTERNATESPEC:::::*

where:

Components from the alternative spec then follow, with records to the same format as in-spec components, except that a Y character is output as a prefix to their short code. A returnto the standard spec for the pipe is indicated by the additional Y character no longer beingoutput. Note that the output of Alternative spec records may be suppressed if theSPECBreak BRANch option is used.

Out-of-specification components take two records, defined thus:

n:::ITEMCODE:QUANTITY*

where:

N.S.:::::::*

3rd NS is third size (format as for 1st NS)

QUANTITY is quantity for component, tube or bolt sets (max 6characters)

BOLTLENGTH is length of bolts, see Notes

n = 1 for SHOP flag = TRUE, = 3 for SHOP flag = FALSE

YY is a fixed identifier to indicate alternative spec

ALTERNATESPEC is the alternative spec name (max 6 characters)

n = 1 for SHOP flag = TRUE,

= 3 for SHOP flag = FALSE

ITEMCODE is from the component’s itemcode (max 12 characters)

QUANTITY is quantity for component, tube or bolt sets

n = 1 for SHOP flag = TRUE, = 3 for SHOP flag

12.0C:7


where:

Note: Out-of-specification components can only be from ‘additional items on the materiallist' in ISODRAFT, i.e. not normal pipeline components.

N.S. is the nominal size of the component

12.0C:8

ISODRAFT Reference ManualRecommendations for Importing DXF files from ISODRAFT into

D Recommendations for Importing DXF files from ISODRAFT into MicroStation

D.1 IntroductionIsometrics produced using ISODRAFT can be passed into MicroStation as DXF files foramendment or the production of a DGN equivalent for issue. These notes refer only toMicroStation/J and the DXF files produced from ISODRAFT.

A straightforward import of an ISODRAFT DXF file into a freshly installed version ofMicroStation/J produces a picture which has accurate rendition of the isometric vectors butfonts and colour are not correct. Neither can a plot be produced, as the colour is white onwhite.

The comments in these notes refer mainly to fonts and colour and how to bring them intoline with the original isometric. Experienced MicroStation users may know simpler ways ofdoing this.

D.2 Importing a DXF FileMicroStation has basic facilities for the importation of DXF files. You have the chance to dothis when invoking MicroStation or if already running MicroStation then the Edit>Importmenu would be used.

During import you may be invited to change various parameters to do with the control ofDXF/DGN translations. Initially at least these should be ignored and the DXF file simplyopened to observe the results.

D.3 FontsPDMS has a very large number of font files that have been assembled over a long periodfrom the public domain, in-house and the user community. They have all been translated tothe AutoCAD standard and take the form of pairs of source (.shp) and compiled (.shx) files.

D.3.1 Installing FontsISODRAFT uses only one set of PDMS text style/font associations:

Text style Font

HTX1 o8116901

12.0D:1


To make AutoCAD-type fonts available within MicroStation the relevant fonts must beinstalled into MicroStation using the standard facilities:

D.3.2 Utilities/Install Fonts menu.To keep them separate the required fonts should be installed into a new font library called,perhaps, pdms.rsc which should be placed with the supplied libraries in the path:

... \bentley\workspace\system\symb

MicroStation refers to fonts by a number not by the name.

Now use the Element>Text menu to check the installation. The newly installed fonts shouldbe visible together with the font numbers assigned by MicroStation to the new fonts.

If required you may change the MicroStation font number as follows:

1. Use the Utilities>Install Fonts menu to give the Font installer dialog box.2. Select font file on destination and change to desired font number.

The new fonts will not yet be ‘visible’ to the MicroStation import function.

D.4 DXF/DGN translation: Making Fonts Active for the Import FunctionDXF/DGN Import and export operations refer to a compiled file which on installedMicroStation/J is:

...\bentley\home\prefs\dwgdata\dwgcontrol.bas

On some installations, this may alternatively be:

...\bentley\Workspace\system\tables\dwg\dwg.bas

This file is a macro file written in the MicroStation macro language BASIC that controlsseveral areas where translations between DWG and DGN are specified. One of these areasis font mapping.

For AutoCAD fonts the font style is obtained from the shx/shp font file and a shape file mayhave many styles.

In MicroStation/J this condition is recognised. In order to map a particular style associatedwith a font file to the required MicroStation font number, it is necessary to include extrainformation in the font section of the translation control file. For example:MbeFontNameTable.addImportEntry "htx1", "o8116901", 168, 1.09, 0

The last two optional parameters enable control of text width and text obliquity (slope) whichMicroStation does not handle well.

This line maps style htx1 in font file o8116901.shx to the MicroStation font 168 using an Xscaling factor of 1.09 and no oblique characters. The value of 1.09 for this particularmapping was obtained by experiment and compensates for the arbitrary character spacingoutput by ISODRAFT.

For the PDMS fonts there is one style per file.

D.5 Compilation of the DXF/DGN Macro Control FileThe MicroStation/J macro control file, dwgcontrol.bas, should be compiled after editing.

12.0D:2


1. On the Utilities>Macro window choose Browse2. Select dwgcontrol.bas.3. Running the macro constitutes compilation.

It is possible that when the macro is run an error message will appear. In this case thenecessary DXF/DGN translators are not yet available to MicroStation and to make themavailable it is necessary to use the import function on any DXF file:

1. On the file/import menu choose DWG or DXF and load any DXF file.2. Now repeat the Utilities>Macro actions above, and exit MicroStation.3. On restart using the DXF option, the font translation will be active and a true rendition

of text should be seen.

D.6 Use of 16-bit Fonts (Far Eastern Fonts)It is not possible to install any 16 bit font (.shx) file into MicroStation/J or earlier.

D.7 ColourThere is no explicit colour information in the ISODRAFT DXF file. The PDMS colourinformation is implicit. This is because of a convention used, which associates a layer namewith a colour. This means that layer name GT_n in the DXF file means PDMS colour n. Thusall objects with the same colour are on the same DXF layer.

In MicroStation an incoming DXF file turns on a default colour table that appears to be thedefault colour table used by AutoCAD:

• Individual objects have the default colour value 6 (on a scale starting at 0) whichtranslates to the AutoCAD default 7 (on a scale starting at 1).

• The colour value is white so everything is white and there can never be anydiscrimination between colours.

• Symbology is not set for any object, so when it is turned on everything changes to red(0), which is 1 on the AutoCAD default table.

The PDMS colour information in the DXF file delivered as ‘GT_’ layer names may betranslated to MicroStation level values by use of the layer/level mapping file used in theimport process.

The default file for this is: dwglevel.tbl (in ..\Bentley\Workspace\system\tables\dwg).Thus PDMS colours 1 - 12 (Layers GT_1 to GT_2) may be made manifest in the DGN file aslevels 1 - 12 by additional entries to this file:

In order to produce true PDMS colours in MicroStation DGN files, it will be necessary toprovide a ‘key-in’ command as a mdl (MicroStation Development Language) function thatwill map the DGN levels to PDMS colours.

Layer in DXF file Level

GT_1 1

GT 2 2

…. ….

GT_12 12

12.0D:3


D.8 Plotting the DGN fileTo get a normal black and white plot of the MicroStation DGN file created on import it isnecessary to reduce the number of colours set in the active file: printer.plt. The value ofnum_pens in this file should be changed from 255 to 1.

12.0D:4

Index


AADD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:10Adding elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:10ALLO attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:72Alternative texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1ANGLEACCURACY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:11ATEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:12Atexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1ATTAs:identifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7, 2:14ATTAs:split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:105ATTEXTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:13AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:15

BBend table:Atexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10Bending table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:92Bendradius:bend table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:16Bendradius:radii description units . . . . . 2:16Bendradius:standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:16Blank area, reserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:106Bolt Report:Atexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10Bolt Report:file specification . . . . . . . . . 2:17Bolt Report:output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:20BOLTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:18Bolting:length descriptions . . . . . . . . . . 2:18BOLTREPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:20BORES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:21Bores:units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:21

CCHANGE HIGHLIGHTING . . . . . . . . . . 2:22Character height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7

character height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:23, 2:96CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:24CLLENGTHFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:26Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2Commands:abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2Commands:arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2COMPIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:1COMPIPE:Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:1, C:4COMPIPE:Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:1COMPIPE:MTO file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:5COMPIPE:Pipe attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . C:2COMPIPE:Text attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . C:2Continuation notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7, 2:27Continuation sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:28Continuation symbols . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7, 2:27Continuation welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:29Continuation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:27CONTNOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:27COORDINATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:29COORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:30Creating macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:103Cut pipe list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:34CUTBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:31CUTMARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:33Cutmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:33CUTPIPELISTFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:34CUTTINGLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:35

DDate:format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:37Default settings:resetting . . . . . . . . . . . 2:85DELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:38Design conditions table . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:93

12.0Index page 1


DETAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:39Detail areas, dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10DETAILPLOTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:93DIMDIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:42Dimensioning style . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:44Dimensions:drawing sheet . . . . . . . . . 2:108Distance units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:48DISTANCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:48Drawing history table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:93dxf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:55Dynamic detail areas:Atexts . . . . . . . . . 4:10

EELEVATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:50Elevation coordinates . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:50Erection details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:65Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:1

FFabrication details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:65Fall rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:51FALLINGLINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:51FALLSKEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:54FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:55File

specifying plot file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:55File:message file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:83File:transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:99, 2:100Flow arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:60FLOWARROWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:60format file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:34Frame lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:61

GGrip length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:31

IINSTALL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:62INSTNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:62Instruments:display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:62Insulation:plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:63INSULATIONCONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:63ISO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:64Isometric Drawing Area#_IsoDrawingArea 4:1Isometric:annotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:91Isometric:Atexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1Isometric:display of information . . . . . . 2:65Isometric:plotting scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:91Isometric:scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:89ISOTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:65

Item numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:50ITEMCODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:66, 2:67

JJOINTNUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:69

KKEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:70

LLine Summary:Atexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:8LINETHICKNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:71LOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE . . 2:72, 3:15

MMARGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:72Margin:width specification . . . . . . . . . . 2:72MARK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:73MATCONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:74Material Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1Material Control File:Creating . . . . . . . . 5:1Material Control File:creating . . . . . . . . 2:74Material Control File:Definition . . . . . . . . 5:1Material Control File:extended . . . . . . . . 5:1Material Control File:Format . . . . . . . . . . 5:1Material descriptions . . . . . . . . . . 2:49, 2:84Material list:Atexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:6, 4:9Material List:displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:75Material list:item numbering . . . . . . . . . 2:50MATERIALLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:75MATLISTFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:81Measurement units . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9, 2:129MESSAGEFILENAME . . . . . . . . . 2:82, 2:83MTEXTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:84

NNumbering joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:69Numbering pulled bends . . . . . . . . . . . 2:88

OOPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:85OUTCOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:85OVERALLSKEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:88

PPBENDNUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:88PICTURESCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:89

12.0Index page 2


PLOTDETAILDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:90Plotted leg length . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:71Plotting isometrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:39PLOTTINGSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:91POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:91PRECISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:100PREPROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:99, 2:100PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:100Project number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:101PROJECTNUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:101

QQuerying options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:101

RRECREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:103REFDIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:103Reference dimensions . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:103Relative text positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:95REMOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:104Removing elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:104REPEATABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:105RESERVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:106

SScreen layout:saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:62SIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:107, 2:108SKEWBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:108Skewed piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:108Spatial coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:30SPECBREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:113SPLIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:114Splitting drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9, 2:114Splitting tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9, 2:127SPOOLNUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:115STACKINGARRANGEMENT . . . . . . . 2:117SUPPORTFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:118SUPPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:119Symbol keys:BEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7Symbol keys:CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3Symbol keys:CLOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4Symbol keys:COUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4Symbol keys:CROS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5Symbol keys:definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1Symbol keys:deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:38Symbol keys:ELBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7Symbol keys:FBLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11Symbol keys:FILT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11Symbol keys:FLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:13Symbol keys:FTUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:15Symbol keys:INST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:16

Symbol keys:LJSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:21Symbol keys:OLET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:30Symbol keys:PCOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:21Symbol keys:REDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:25Symbol keys:reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:42Symbol keys:SHU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:30Symbol keys:TEE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:30Symbol keys:TRAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:34Symbol keys:UNIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:36Symbol keys:UNIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:36Symbol keys:Universal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:36Symbol keys:VALV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:37Symbol keys:VENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:39Symbol keys:VFWA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:39Symbol keys:VTWA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:40Symbol keys:WELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:41Symbol library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:119SYMBOLFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:119

TTAGGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:120TAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:120Text:positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:92Text:rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:92TEXTPOSITION, see POSITION . . . . . 2:91Title block:Atexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5TITLEBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:122TOLERANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:123TRACINGCONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:124Transfer file:creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:24Transfer file:processing . . . . . . . . . . . 2:100TRANSFERFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . 2:125TRUNCATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:125TTFONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:126TUBESPLITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:127

UUNDERLAYPLOTNAME . . . . . . . . . . 2:128UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:129User Defined Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:93

VView direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:64

WWASTAGE AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:130Weld Box:Atexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:9Weld table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:93WELDID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:132WELDNUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:132

12.0Index page 3


Welds:identification . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9, 2:132Welds:numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9, 2:132Welds:types displayed . . . . . . . . 2:9, 2:135WELDTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:135

ZZEROLENGTHSKEWS . . . . . . . . . . . 2:136

12.0Index page 4

Reference Manual

Documents

Transcript of Reference Manual